Home

3 Features A

1. s CO 4 pin Jacks Extension 6 pin jacks Paging Jack 2 Paging Jack 1 External Music Jack 2 External Music Jack 1 System Clear Switch Reset Button Front Cover CO Modular Jacks Extension Amphenol Connector External Music Jack 2 External Music Jack 1 System Clear Switch Reset Button 2 6 Installation 22 Installation of the Main Unit Power Supply for KX TD816 Check the Voltage Selector to confirm if it is set to your house hold AC voltage If not reset the Voltage Selector on the back of the main unit to the correct position with a screwdriver Voltage Selector 115 V 200 V 220 V 240 V Plug Adaptor for KX TD816BX The plug adaptor included is to be used if the power plug will not fit your socket Assemble as shown below using the plug which fits your socket In this case be sure to connect the frame of the main unit to ground because the ground line in the powe
2. 3 Hook the cabinet on the main unit and 5 Connect the frame of the expansion unit slide the cabinet to the left until it is to ground Secure the inside screw firmly fixed to fix the cabinet to the main unit D1232 lw 8 pay to DI dau dm N VW To ground Note If two or three expansion units are installed frame ground connection is 4 Loosen the outside screw and slide the required for only one unit cover to the right Panasonic Outside screw 2 56 Installation 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 6 E If KX TD180D is to be installed for KX TD1232DBX DX Insert required telephone wires into the Insert the plug into a jack on the unit holes in a plug Fix the transparent part into the black part Note Do not peel off the coating of the wires Insert the wires to the ends Jack for Power Failure Transfer F co9 CO10 coll Cou u __ Io Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office 4 pin plug Rows t For details refer to Section 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer E If KX TD180 is to be installed for KX TD1232BX C HK ML NL NZ X Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords 4 conductor wiring into the modular
3. peremen E eg Jacks 1 through 16 are located from bottom to top 4 To extensions Jacks 1 16 Installation 2 21 2 3 3 Extension Connection Jack 01 through Jack 16 for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 1 Using Modular Connector for KX TD816C NL NZ Connection Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords 4 conductor wiring into the modular jacks on the system D1 Data 1 D2 Data 2 R Ring T Tip D2 E aR T Spi View of TEL Jack Extension Jack 8 m Jack 7 m Jack 6 Jack Jack 4 m Jack 3 m Jack 2 m Jack 1 E EE AB HOOK H S To extensions Jacks 1 8 Notes Mis connection may cause the system to operate improperly See Section 6 1 1 Installation and 6 1 2 Connection before connection 2 22 Installation 2 3 3 Extension Connection Jack 01 through Jack 16 for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DS
4. 5 2 Default Values Address Program Default 322 329 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 Not Stored 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit All Modification Tables 0 digits 331 ARS Modify Added Number Not Stored CO Line Programming 400 CO Line Connection Assignment All CO Lines Connect 401 CO Line Group Assignment CO01 TRG 1 CO02 TRG 2 CO03 TRG 3 CO04 TRG 4 CO05 TRG 5 CO06 TRG 6 CO07 TRG 7 KX TD816 CO08 TRG 8 KX TD1232 CO08 through CO24 TRG8 402 Dial Mode Selection See page 4 79 403 Pulse Speed Selection 404 DTMF Time All CO Lines 80 ms 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set All CO Lines 400 ms for KX TD816C 1232C All CO Lines Disable for the others 406 Caller ID Assignment All CO Lines Disable 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extenston Day Night All CO Lines Disable Day Night 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night All CO Line Groups Disable Day Night 411 Host PBX Access Codes Not Stored 412 Pause Time All CO Line Groups 1 5 s 413 Flash Time All CO Line Groups 96 ms for KX TD816NL 1232NL All CO Line Groups 600 ms for the other systems 414 Disconnect Time All CO Line Groups 1 5 s 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set Disable 416 Reverse Circuit Assignment Regular COS Programming 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day All COS Level 1 Day Night Night 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration All COS Disable Limit 503 Call Transfer to CO Line All COS E
5. SST Install Backup Battery and Adaptor Card KX A216 Operates all the features in the event of a power failure Install Doorphone Card KX TD160 This card connects two doorphones and two door openers Remote Card System Inter Connection Card DISA Card Doorphone Card for KX TD1232 Remote Card Connector System Inter Connection Card Connector DISA Card CEET toe SS SYSTEM INTER CONNECTION Connector Doorphone Card Connector Front Cover is open DOORPHONE r Install Remote Card KX TD196 This card provides data communications between the system and a remote location Install System Inter Connection Card KX TD192 This card connects two systems in parallel Install DISA Card KX TD191 This card permits access to the system from outside Install Doorphone Card KX TD160 This card connects two doorphones and two door openers Installation 2 47 2 4 1 Location of O
6. 809 DISA Security Type Non Security 810 DISA Tone Detection Enable 811 DISA User Codes Code 1 1111 COS 1 Code 2 2222 COS 1 Code 3 3333 COS 1 Code 4 4444 COS 1 812 DISA DTMF Repeat Dial and Call Repeat 813 Floating Number Assignment e KX TD816 Pager 1 196 e KX TD1232 Pager 1 196 Pager 2 197 Pager 3 296 Pager 4 297 DISA 1 198 DISA 2 298 MODEM 299 814 Modem Standard BELL for KX TD1232C CCITT for the other systems Option Programming 990 System Additional Information See pages 4 127 through 4 129 991 COS Additional Information See page 4 131 992 CO Line Group Additional Information Not Applicable Available for KX TD1232 only List 5 7 Section 6 Troubleshooting This section provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting 6 1 Troubleshooting 6 1 1 Installation PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION Extension does not operate Bad printed circuit board Exchange printed circuit board for Extension Card another printed circuit board Bad connection between the system and extension A telephone with an A A1 relay is connected Bad extension Take that extension and plug it into the same extension port using a short telephone cord If the telephone does not work connection between the system and the extension must be repaired Use a 2 wire cord Set the A A1 relay switch of the telephone to OUT or OFF
7. Outside screw 2 50 Installation 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 5 Connect the frame of the expansion unit to the ground Secure the inside screw to fix the cabinet to the main unit To ground Note If two expansion units are installed frame ground connection is required for only one unit 6 If KX TD180D is to be installed for KX TD816BX HK ML Insert required telephone wires into the Insert the plug into a jack on the unit holes in a plug Fix the transparent part into the black part Note Do not peel off the coating of the wires Insert the wires to the ends Jack for Power Failure Transfer Cos C06 07 cos u To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office 4 pin plug wH RA For details refer to Section 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer Installation 2 51 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 E If KX TD180 is to be installed for KX TD816C NL NZ Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords 4 conductor wiring into the modular jacks on the unit TURI T2 R2 CO 5 CO6 ul Poe CO 7 CO 8 T2 R1 T1 R2 d R Ring T Tip oN View of TEL Jack CO Jack for Power Failure Transfer E
8. 4 128 System Programming 4 10 Option Programming System Additional Information conta 990 Field Description Selection Default References 18 Assigns if an extension s mailbox number is 0 extension 0 Voice Mail substituted by the extension number or it is number Integration programmable free If a call is forwarded 1 free or rerouted to the VPS this system automatically transmits the mailbox number to the VPS to specify the user s mailbox To make it programmable select 1 free then assign the number in program 609 Voice Mail Access Codes 19 Assigns the first display of a digital large 0 names 0 Special Features display proprietary telephone KX T7235 1 numbers for KX T7235 in Station Speed Dialing Station Speed Dialing 20 Assigns the source of Music Source 1 for 0 internal music 0 for KX TD e Background Music on Hold and BGM Internal music source E Music BGM source is not available for your system 1 external music Koma Background source BX HK ML Music BGM NL NZ X External 1 for KX TD Music on Hold 816C 1232C 21 Selects inter digit pause for pulse dialing 00 630 ms 01 None 01 830 ms 10 1030 ms 22 Selects intercom dial tone frequency 0 normal 0 None 1 distinctive 26 Selects the extension hooking signal 0 84 1000 ms 0 for KX TD None detection time 1 2
9. 14 Determines if the dialed and will be checked by Toll Restriction This assignment is required for certain central offices CO to prevent toll fraud Some CO ignore the user dialed and If your CO is such a type select 0 no check no check check Toll Restriction 15 Enables or disables the Flash function when receiving a CO call at a locked or toll restricted station Flash if enabled allows the user to make a CO call using the same line at the station This is also allowed for those extensions that have Account Code Verified All Calls mode assigned if 0 disconnection signal is selected in field 3 above disable enable Flash 16 Allows you to remove Confirmation Tone 3 This tone is sent when a conversation is established just after dialing the feature numbers for accessing the following features Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve disable enable Confirmation Tone 17 A CO line set to pulse or call blocking mode in program 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two settings This assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing Select an appropriate ratio depending on the standard in your country 60 67 0 for KX TD 816C HK NL KX TD1232 C HK NL 1 for KX TD 816BX ML NZ X KX TD 1232BX ML NZ X Dial Type Selection
10. Use 4 conductor wiring cord To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office T2 R1 T1 R2 NN R Ring F l W T Tip Gace gl S ae Ai fk View of TEL Jack CO ED eS i d 8 e T1 R1 T2 R2 l wen i iH CO7 CO8 Le E Wi CO 5 CO6 ED L E Wi len CO 3 CO4 fei A O CO1 CO2 Use 4 conductor wiring cord To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office Notice e Use twisted pair cable for installation e It is recommended to use the telephone CO jacks of CA 14A for KX TD816C KX TD1232C e Mis connection may cause the system to operate improperly See Section 6 1 1 Installation and 6 1 2 Connection before connection 2 18 Installation Ze Extension Connection for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 There are four methods to perform Extension Connection using a 4 pin connector a 6 pin connector a modular connector and an Amphenol Connec
11. seeeeeeeereeeeeeee 4 25 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment 4 26 008 Absent leese Eder 4 28 4 3 System ET 4 29 100 Flexible Number ses sisccisssiessuuscecacscuadaats desccetacncodateeessacts 4 29 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode A 4 32 102 Day Night Service Starting Time ee eeeeeeeeeereeeneeeees 4 33 103 Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment 0004 4 35 LOST Account oder a A 4 36 106 Station Hunting Type zeneietienbeer sesscsceseesancsdewededeades Mes Aen G eeget 4 37 107 Syst m Password ii eege DEA 4 38 108 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button ssssssessseseseeeesseessssssessee 4 39 109 Expansion Unit Types eree a a a ii 4 40 E 1110 Caller ID Cod Seta meneeng gees R E A 4 42 HEEL Caller Name Set e e Se 4 43 113 VM Status DTMF Set 24 32555 2svadies 13 se andattehe at sactanasaeetnasuaecasecves 4 44 114 VM Command DTMF Set 4 46 HSI Adj st KEE 4 48 116 ROM Version Display ssessseeeseeeesseesseesseesseessseesseesseesseessees 4 49 4 4 Timer Programming esssccescoessocesscessocesocesoocssocessecssccesocssoosesosessee 4 50 200 Hold Recall Time 2 0 cccccsessssecececcceeeesssseceeeseeeesesensnaees 4 50 201 Transfer Recall Tme ccccccessccceccceeseserseceeeeeeeeessessaees 4 51 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Tme 4 52 203 Intercept TIM EE 4 53 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time cee eeeeeceeeeeceneeeesteeeesteeeenae
12. Wiring Precautions 1 2 Se Dusty places or places where water or oil may come into Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines In direct sunlight and hot cold or humid places Temperature range 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Sulfuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs etc may damage the equipment or contacts Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong contact with the unit Near high frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders On or near computers telexes or other office equipment as well as microwave ovens or air conditioners It is preferable not to install in the same room with the above equipment Install at least 1 8 m 6 feet from radios and televisions both the main unit and proprietary telephones Do not obstruct area around the main unit for reasons of maintenance and inspection be especially careful to allow space for cooling above and at the sides of the main unit Make sure to keep the following instructions when wiring 1 Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power source computer telex etc If the cables are run near those wi
13. 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Section 3 Features Call Transfer Screened to CO Line System Programming 4 95 504 4 7 COS Programming Call Forwarding to CO Line Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References This program determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform the Call Forwarding to CO Line function e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS e Disable Enable All COS Disable 1 Enter 504 Display Call FWD to CO 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Section 3 F
14. Extension The system supports eight extension groups Any member of an extension group can pick up a call directed to another group member Group Call Pickup In addition there are Paging Group and Station Hunting features e Every extension should belong to an extension group but cannot belong to more than one group If System Connection is employed an extension group can include extensions on both systems Programming References Feature References Operation References Section 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type 602 Extension Group Assignment Section 3 Features Call Pickup Group Station Hunting Paging Group Not applicable External Feature Access Description Conditions Allows the extension user to have access to the features of a host PBX Centrex or Central Office such as Call Waiting etc This is performed by putting the current party on hold and sending a flash signal e This feature is effective only during a CO call However if FLASH feature Disconnection signal is enabled by System Programming this feature does not work e The flash time must be assigned as required by the Centrex host PBX or CO line e With a proprietary telephone the FLASH button or the feature number Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 63 E 3 Features is used to perform this function With a single line telephone the feature number cannot be used when the user already has
15. Notes The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit e The 6 conductor wiring cord and the Modular T Adaptor KX J36 is required if the proprietary telephone KX T7130 is to be used for parallel connection for KX TD1232 2 30 Installation 2 3 5 Paralleled Telephone Connection for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone Method 2 for Digital Proprietary Telephone only 4 conductor wiring cord 2 conductor wiring cord lt Connect pins T R D1 Connect pins T and R and D2 Rear of the telephone To main unit To Single Line TO EMSS Telephone TO is printed TEL is printed A Single Line Digital Proprietary Se Telephone Telephone KX T7220 KX T7051 or KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7052 KX T7250 Notes e The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit e Not only a single line telephone but a single line device such as an answering machine a facsimile or a modem personal computer etc can be connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone Feature References Section 3 Features Paralleled Telephone Installation 2 31 2 3 6 EXtra Device Port XDP Connection for a Digital Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone A digital proprietary
16. Busy No Answer Call Forwarding No Answer 4 52 System Programming Available for KX TD1232 only 4 4 Timer Programming 203 Intercept Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the number of rings for the Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA feature If a call is not answered before the programmed number of rings the call is redirected to the programmed station Number of rings 3 through 48 12 rings 1 Enter 203 Display Intercept Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 12 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e One ring is equivalent to five seconds e Programs 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night are used to program the destination of Intercept Routing on a CO line group basis in day and night modes e If the original extension has set Call Forwarding No Answer Intercept Timer starts after the Call Forwarding e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Intercept Routing System Programming 4 53 204 4 4 Timer Programming Pickup Dial Waiting Time Description Sets the number of seconds for Pickup Dialing If the telephone user lifts the handset the programmed party is called when the time expires Selection Time seconds 1 through 5 Default ls Programming 1 Enter 204 D
17. Feature References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming 0 0ccceccceeceseereeeneeeeeneenaeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Direct Station Selection DSS Button Section 3 Features Button Direct Station DSS Console KX T7240 Selection DSS KX T7040 Operation References Not applicable Busy Station Signaling BSS Description Conditions When attempting to call a busy extension Busy Station Signaling allows you to signal the user on the phone to answer your call The called extension user hears a Call Waiting tone and is able to answer the call e This feature is effective if the called extension has enabled Call Waiting If Call Waiting is enabled the caller will hear ringback tone if not the caller will hear reorder tone e If the called party is provided with Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA function the caller can announce the call through the speaker Programming References No programming required Features 3 13 B Feature References Operation References User Manual 3 Features Section 3 Features Call Waiting Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA DPT Features SLT Features Busy Station Signaling BSS Button Direct Station Selection DSS Description Conditions DSS button permits the proprietary telephone user one touch access to other extension users e A flexible CO button on a proprietary te
18. Parallel connection of telephones is possible Refer to Section 2 3 4 Paralleled Telephone Connection needs Optional Cards or Adaptor Installation 2 15 2 3 2 CO Line Connection KX TD816 CO1 through CO4 KX TD1232 CO1 through CO8 There are two methods to perform CO Line Connection using a 4 pin connector and a modular connector Which method should be used depends on the model number of the system as shown below Model number Connector to be used KX TD816BX HK ML 4 pin Connector KX TD1232DBX DX KX TD816C NL NZ Modular Connector KX TD1232BX C HK ML NL NZ X 1 Using 4 pin Connector for KX TD816BX HK ML KX TD1232BX DX Wire Specifications Use 4 pin plugs included to connect CO lines Wire Solid wire Diameter of conductor 00 4 60 65 mm 22 24 26AWG Diameter including coating 40 66 91 05 mm Connection Use 4 pin plugs included to connect CO lines There are two plugs to connect four CO lines for KX TD816 and four plugs to connect eight CO lines for KX TD1232 A plug is able to connect two CO lines Use twisted pair cable 1 Insert required telephone wires into the holes in a plug Fix the transparent part into the black part Notes Do not peel off the coating of the wires Insert the wires to the ends 4 pin plug 2 16 Installation 2 3 2 CO Line Connection KX TD816 CO1 through CO4 KX TD1232 CO1 through CO8 2 Insert the plug into an CO jack in the ma
19. 00csocsseseossssesssssvoscsssossevsesvescvssssvessscsess 1 4 1 3 Proprietary Telephones sascsscsissssscssccssescsasseacsiessaasesasssicssesssesssacisaisvens 1 5 E WT 1 6 L t 8 Station Line Unit RX TIT 7 iccsctevscnassceschescnvseancavcrneacaelas 1 6 1 4 2 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 cssscscacasisieciunsntaredsacdetavsasnacedsantees 1 6 1 4 3 System Inter Connection Card KX TD192 oes 1 6 a ey DISA Card em TID RE 1 7 E 1 4 5 Caller ID Card CR Eege 1 7 1 4 6 Remote Card KSTDlOoen cc ccccccsssssecececeeeeeessrseseeeeees 1 7 1 4 7 Doorphone Card CEET 1 8 1 4 8 Backup Battery and Adaptor Card KX A216 eee 1 8 14 9 Battery Adaptor KX AAG scsi cesescontisevecntesunseeesiivenvtiensennaes 1 9 1 4 10 DSS Console KX T7240 KX T7040 ccccecesseeesseeeesseeees 1 9 1 5 Specifications so scccscisscassossssevessessnssssncdcesessssancdiescasconsseenseessnencetonsesendesie 1 10 1 51 Ge n ral Description geseet 1 10 15 2 Characters eege 1 13 15 3 System Capacity E 1 14 Section 2 Installation 2 1 Before Installation ssssssssssscsssssssssossssssscossssssssssssssssoss ssssssosssosassssss sss 2 2 2 2 Installation of the Main Unit eossesooesocssesoossosssessossocssessossosssessose 2 4 Deed Be 2 4 22 2 Nameand Location egen ageet eege 2 4 22 9 Wal reueg e a 2 8 2 2 4 Frame Ground Connection ssssssssssssseseesseressseeressssressssresese 2 10 2 2 3 Opening Front Covers a aa 2 11 PAR COMME CHI i EE A E E
20. 1 Slave Not applicable 1 Enter 116 Display ROM Version Press NEXT Display System NO gt Enter the System Number The display shows the ROM version of the specified system To confirm the other system press SELECT and enter the System Number The display shows the ROM version of the specified system Press END e The out of service system number is unacceptable e For KX TD816 you can enter the system number 0 only None Skip step 4 System Programming 4 49 200 4 4 Timer Programming Hold Recall Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the length of the hold recall timer This timer is used to alert an extension that a call has been held for an extended period of time Time seconds 0 through 240 O Hold Recall disabled 60 s 1 4 5 Enter 200 Display Hold Recall Time Press NEXT Display example Time 60 sec Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time Press STORE Press END e Select 0 if Hold Recall is not required e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Hold Recall 4 50 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 201 Transfer Recall Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the number of rings before the transfer recall occurs Ifa transferred call is not answ
21. 805 4 9 Resource Programming External Pager Confirmation Tone Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to remove the confirmation tone for external pagers The default setting sends confirmation tone 2 to the external pagers before paging is broadcast This programming applies to all the external pagers On Off On 1 Enter 805 Display Ext Pag Ack Tone 2 Press NEXT Display example Tone On 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END The external pager is a user supplied item For KX TD816 one external pager can be installed for KX TD1232 two external pagers can be installed per system External pagers 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available Section 3 Features Confirmation Tone Paging External Paging All 4 116 System Programming 4 9 Resource Programming 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters Description New line code Baud rate Word length Parity Stop bit Selection Default Programming Assigns the communication parameters for the EIA RS 232C interface for Port 1 for KX TD816 and Master System of KX TD1232 or Port 2 for Slave System of KX TD1232 Select the code for your printer or personal computer If your printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with carriage return select CR If not select CR
22. Ground Terminal Battery Adaptor Connector AC Inlet Power Switch WW GZ Lo ma Oz Ground Terminal ETA RS 232C Connector Battery Adaptor Connector Lae Power Indicator AAC Inlet Power Switch Installation Available for KX TD816BX only 22 Installation of the Main Unit Inside View of the Main Unit KX TD816 4 pin Connector Type el H H 4 Extension Modular Jacks l RI O H CO Modular Jack E7 odular Jacks Fuse Front Cover KX TD816 Modular Connector Type Extension Modular Jacks CO Modular Jacks Installation 2 5 2 2 Installation of the Main Unit KX TD1232 4 pin 6 pin Connector Type E a
23. Installation 2 8 System Data Clear After storing or changing the system programming data it is possible to clear your programming data stored in the system if required The system will restart with the default setting 1 Slide the System Clear Switch to the CLEAR position 2 Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool 3 Return the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL position while the power indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds Notice After pressing the Reset Button return the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL position at step 3 while the power indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds Otherwise the system is not cleared Installation 2 79 Section 3 Features This section describes every basic optional and programmable feature in alphabetical order It also provides information about the conditions connection references programming required related features and operation for every feature A 3 Features Absent Message Capability Description Once set this option provides a message on the display of the calling extension to show the reason for the called extension s absence Nine messages can be programmed as desired which are available for every extension user There are six pre programmed default messages Setting or cancelling a message can be done by individual extension users but only callers with a display telephone can receive the message Condit
24. KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Enable Disable All CO lines Disable 1 Enter 406 Display Caller ID Asn 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 e The following programs are used to program Caller ID feature 110 Caller ID Code Set and 111 Caller ID Name Set Section 3 Features Caller ID Available for KX TD816C 1232C and System Programming 4 83 KX TD816HK 1232HK only 407 408 4 5 CO Line Programming DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night Description The Direct In Lines DIL 1 1 feature allows incoming CO calls to be directed to a specific extension When a CO line is assigned as DIL 1 1 it is necessary to assign the destination These programs specify the extension number for day or night mode Selection e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX
25. 113 VM Status DTMF Set RBT 1 BT 2 ROT 3 DND 4 Answer 5 Disconnect 9 Confirm 9 FWD VM RBT 6 FWD VM BT 7 FWD EXT RBT 8 114 VM Command DTMF Set LV MSG H GETMSG H AA SVC 8 VM SVC 6 115 Adjust Time 1 00 am 116 ROM Version Display Not Applicable Timer Programming 200 Hold Recall Time 60 s 201 Transfer Recall Time 12 rings 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time 3 rings 203 Intercept Time 12 rings 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time ls 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration 10 min Time 206 CO to CO Call Duration Time 10 min 207 First Digit Time 10s 208 Inter Digit Time 10s 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times See page 4 59 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time See page 4 60 211 Dial Start Time See page 4 61 212 Call Duration Count Start Time Os 213 DISA Delayed Answer Time 1 ring 214 DISA Prolong Time 3 min 215 Outgoing Message Time 32 0 32 0 s TRS ARS Programming 300 TRS Override for System Speed Disable Dialing 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Not Stored Levels 2 through 6 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Not Stored Levels 2 through 6 311 Special Carrier Access Codes Not Stored 312 ARS Mode Off 313 ARS Time Time A 8 00 am Time B 5 00 pm Time C 9 00 pm Time D Disable 314 321 ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 Not Stored Available for KX TD1232 only List 5 5
26. 50 seconds before the time out Alarm tone is generated to both Features 3 41 C 3 Features outside parties 15 seconds before the time out The call is disconnected at the time out unless the extension returns to the call e This feature is not available for KX TD816NL 1232NL Programming References Section 4 System Programming 206 CO to CO Call Duration Time 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 503 Call Transfer to CO Line Feature References Section 3 Features Conference Limited Call Duration Hold Recall Operation References DPT Features User Manual Conference Unattended Confirmation Tone Description At the end of many different functions the system confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to the extension user through the speaker of the telephone Confirmation tone 1 a Indicates that the new setting differs from the previous setting b Set or cancel the Electronic Station Lockout ls i E Confirmation tone 2 a Indicates that the new setting is identical to the previous setting b In addition sent when various features are successfully performed or accessed e g Call Hold Automatic Callback Busy c Sent when accessing external paging equipment e g Paging All Paging External Confirmation tone from external pagers can be enabled or disabled ls 1 rh tt 3 42 Features 3 Features C Confirmation tone 3 Sent when a conve
27. BGM e Music source number KX TD816 1 No Use KX TD1232 1 through 4 No Use Hold and BGM Music 1 1 Enter 803 Display Music Source Use 2 Press NEXT to program Music on Hold Display example Hold Musicl 3 Enter a music source number To select no music source press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new music source number Press STORE Press NEXT to program BGM Display example BGM Musicl 6 Enter a music source number To select no music source press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new music source number Press STORE Press END e The music source is a user supplied item For KX TD816 one music source can be installed for KX TD1232 two music sources can be installed per system Music sources 1 and 2 are connected to the Master System 3 and 4 are to the Slave if available Any music source can be used by either system The systems except the KX TD816C and KX TD1232C are provided with an internal music source By default setting internal music source is used as Music Source 1 for these systems Program 990 System Additional Information Field 20 is used to select external music source for Music 1 e To disable music press CLEAR at steps 3 and 6 e Program 804 External Pager BGM is used to enable disable BGM for each external pager Section 3 Features Background Music BGM Music on Hold Background Music BGM External
28. Features System Speed Dialing Special Display Features for KX T7235 System Speed Dialing Station Feature Clear Description Allows the extension user to cancel the functions set on the user s own telephone The following functions will be cancelled by this feature Absent Message Capability The message set on the telephone Background Music that has been turned on Call Forwarding Call Pickup Deny Call Waiting enabled 3 106 Features 3 Features Conditions None Programming References S Data Line Security Do Not Disturb DND Executive Busy Override Deny Message Waiting All the messages that have been left by other extension users Paralleled Telephone enabled Pickup Dialing Timed Reminder Section 4 System Programming 100 Feature References None Flexible Numbering Station feature clear Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Station Feature Clear Station Hunting Description If a called extension is busy Station Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the extension group Idle extensions are automatically hunted according to the programmed type There are four hunting types available Circular Termination Voice Mail VM and Automated Attendant AA Circular hunting The extensions are hunted until an idle one is found regardless of jack number Termination hunting The extensions are hunted until reaching
29. Primary Power Central Office Loop Limit Environmental Requirements Hookswitch Flash Timing Range 70 Vrms at 25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load Service Unit Primary Power KX TD1232 D BX HK ML NL NZ 220 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 4 A max KX TD1232C 120 VAC 60 Hz 2 A max KX TD1232 D X 110 120 VAC 50 60 Hz 2 A max 1 600 ohms max 0 40 C 32 104 F 10 90 84 1 000 milliseconds for KX TD1232NL 204 1 000 milliseconds for the other systems 1 5 3 System Capacity Lines Cards Station Equipment Item System Inter Connection Card Service Unit 4 CO Line Unit CO Line KX TD1232 Max Quantity KX TD816 Single System Max Quantity System Connection 2 1 1 2 1 4 CO s 1 4 CO s 2 8 CO s 8 12 24 1 14 System Outline Available for KX TD1232 only 15 Specifications 8 Station Line Unit 1 8 extn 2 16 extn 4 32 extn Extension Jack 16 32 64 Station Terminal 32 64 128 including DSS Consoles DSS Console 4 4 8 DISA Card 1 2 7 Caller ID Card 2 3 6 Remote Card 1 2 Doorphone Card 1 1 2 Doorphone 2 2 4 Door Opener 2 2 4 External Pager 1 2 4 External Music Source 1 2 4 System Data Item Max Quantity Operator 2 System Speed Dialing 100 One Touch Dialing 24 per station proprietary telephone Station Speed Dialing 10 per station Call Park 10 Absent Message 9 CO Line Group 8 Toll Re
30. Ring KT 5 2 5 2 Default Values ege deed 5 4 Section 6 Troubleshooting D MS KT TE OT 6 2 GA Installation iiss ys eavidsiets a a a a aast 6 2 EE E COMME CH ON EE 6 3 GALES Re 6 4 6 1 4 Using Reset Etgen 6 5 16 Available for KX TD1232 only Section 1 System Outline This section provides general information on the system including system capacity and specifications 1 1 System Highlights System Capacity Module Expansion Basic Module System System Expansion Connection KX TD816 CO line 4 8 Extension 8 16 KX TD1232 CO line 8 12 24 Extension 16 32 64 Expansion modules are used to increase the system capacity One CO line module can be added to the basic system to add four CO lines For KX TD816 one extension module can be added to the basic system to add 8 extensions and for KX TD1232 two extension modules to add 16 extensions EXtra Device Port XDP Each extension jack in the system supports the connection of a digital proprietary telephone and a single line device The devices have different extension numbers and are treated as two completely different extensions Paralleled Telephone Connection Super Hybrid System System Connection Every jack in the system also supports the parallel connection of a proprietary telephone and a single line device They share the same extension number and are considered by the system to be one extension This system supports the connection
31. Station Drogramming User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button Section 3 Features Limited Call Duration DPT Features SLT Features Call Forwarding to CO Line Call Hold CO Line Description Conditions Allows the extension user to put a CO call on hold The held call can be retrieved from the user who held it or from any other extension e With a single line telephone the user can hold only one call whether it is an extension or CO call e Music is sent to the party on hold if available Music on Hold e If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Hold Recall results e If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected Programming References 100 Flexible Numbering Call hold 200 Hold Recall Time 3 26 Features 3 Features C Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 3 Features Hold Recall Music on Hold DPT Features SLT Features Call Hold Call Hold Intercom Description Conditions This is used to place an intercom call on hold The held call can be retrieved from the user who held it or from any other extension e Only one intercom call can be placed on hold in a telephone at a time up to 10 calls in the system Call Park With a proprietary telephone CO calls and one intercom call can be placed on hold at the same time With a single line telephone either o
32. System and CO13 through CO 24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one CO line group press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COO1 Section 3 Features CO Line Group 4 78 System Programming 4 5 CO Line Programming 402 Dial Mode Selection Description Each CO line can be programmed for DTMF pulse rotary or call blocking This program assigns your choice to each line DTMF The dialing signals from an extension either tone or pulse are converted to tone signals and transmitted to the CO line Pulse The dialing signals from an extension either tone or pulse are converted to pulse signals and transmitted to the CO line Call blocking If your central office can receive both DTMF and pulse signals but you are contracted for pulse select this mode When dialing on the line with a touch tone telephone only the pulse signals are sent to the CO line Selection e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e DTMF Pulse C Block call blocking Default Model Number Default KX TD816BX ML NZ KX TD1232 D BX ML NZ All CO Lines Pulse KX TD816C HK NL KX TD1232C HK NL D X Al CO Lines DTMF Programming 1 Enter 402 Display CO Dial Mode 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also pr
33. User Manual Pulse to Tone Conversion Redial Automatic Description This is a special feature for the proprietary telephones that provides automatic redialing of the last dialed saved number or call log if the called party is busy If the Last Number Redial Saved Number Redial or Call Log operation is performed handsfree the telephone set will hang up and try again after a pre determined period of time 3 98 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features R Conditions e Redial Repeat Time and Interval Time can be changed by System Programming e Pressing FLASH allows the system to cancel this feature e If any dialing operation is done during Automatic Redial this function is finished e This feature is not available with KX T7055 or KX T7250 e This feature is not available with KX TD816NL 1232NL Programming References Section 4 System Programming 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time Feature References Section 3 Features Redial Last Number Redial Saved Number Special Features for KX T7235 Call Log Operation References DPT Features User Manual Redial Automatic Redial Last Number Description Every telephone in the system automatically saves the last telephone number dialed to a CO line and allows the extension user to dial the same number again Conditions e With a proprietary telephone REDIAL button is used to carry out Last Number Redial With a single lin
34. e DIL 1 1 to the modem allows the caller to perform remote administration DIL 1 1 to an external pager sounds the pager when receiving incoming calls TAFAS feature DIL 1 1 to DISA message allows an external caller to access the system directly DISA feature Programming References Section 4 System Programming 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Direct Inward System Access DISA Description Allows a CO caller to access specific system features as if the caller is an extension in the system The caller can have direct access to features such as e Placing an intercom call to an extension an operator a modem for remote system administration or an external pager for TAFAS e Calling an external party For external calling it is necessary to program either Non Security or CO Line Security mode In Non Security 3 48 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Conditions Features D mode any outside caller may make CO calls In CO Line Security mode it is necessary to enter a pre assigned DISA user code to make CO calls This prevents the caller from making unauthorized calls However when making a CO call by Call Forwarding to CO Line the call is exceptionally permitted An Outgoing Message can be programmed for the DISA feature When a caller reaches the DISA lin
35. telephone PT temporarily to store one touch dialing into memory The Function Buttons F1 through F10 are corresponded to speed dial numbers as follows Fl 0 F6 5 F2 1 F7 6 F3 2 F8 7 F4 3 F9 8 F5 4 F10 9 Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Station speed dialing Station speed dialing programming Section 3 Features One Touch Dialing Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Station Speed Dialing System Connection Description System Connection allows two main units KX TD1232 to work together as one system This expands the capacity of the system number of extensions CO lines and so on Two connected systems are called the master and the slave systems A maximum capacity of the system is as follows Item Maximum Quantity Maximum Quantity Single System System Connection CO Line 12 24 3 112 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features S LA N Extension Jack DSS Console Doorphone Door Opener External Pager Music Source NNNNA oN FAK HOH Conditions e The following resources can be used by either system a External pagers b Music sources used for Music on Hold c Music sources used for Background Music BGM d Station Message Detail Recording SMDR EIA RS 232C ports e Call Parking areas e System Inter Connection Card KX TD192 optional
36. the system functions as if it was in power failure Refer to Power Failure Transfer feature Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 6 Remote Card Installation Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 107 System Password 813 Floating Number Assignment 814 Modem Standard Section 3 Features System Programming with Station Message Detail Proprietary Telephone Recording SMDR Operation References Not applicable System Programming with Proprietary Telephone Description Conditions This system can be programmed with a personal computer or a proprietary telephone PT Proprietary telephones available for System Programming are KX T7235 KX T7230 KX T7130 KX T7030 KX T7033 Display Proprietary Telephones Two extensions are allowed to perform System Programming The extensions available are 1 An extension that is connected to jack 01 2 An extension that is assigned as a manager For more information and programming instructions refer to Section 4 System Programming e During System Programming the system operates normally e During System Programming the extension is considered to be busy e The display on the PT permits interactive programming e Only one access is allowed to System Programming at any one time e To access system administration a valid password must be entered The password is factory programmed and can be changed e A pers
37. 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day TINTS Nicaea aa a n R aucdoen dees 4 104 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment gt Days LEE 4 106 Available for KX TD816C 1232C and KX TD816HK 1232HK only 2 Available for KX TD816BX and KX TD1232DBX DX only 15 Contents 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night 4 108 609 Voice Mail Access Code 4 110 4 9 Resource ProgrammMing cccssssccssssscssscscssscsssssccsssssssssssssesssees 4 111 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout 4 111 801 SMDR Format 4 112 802 System Data Prime exces sn Eeer 4 113 803 Music Source Use A a A aAa Ni 4 114 804 External Pager BOOM 4 115 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone 4 116 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters 0 cccccessssecececeeeesenensees 4 117 lr DISA S curity Een ee 4 119 810 DISA Tone Detection cccccccccccccececececececeeseeeseeeeeees 4 120 817 DISA User EE 4 121 1812 DISA DTMF Repeal E 4 122 813 Floating Number Assignment 0 eeeesseceseceeeeeeneeeaeees 4 123 814 Modem Standard 4 125 4 10 Option Programming 6 icdccseesessdecscvessvasenesdvcaccesserceveacsecsecoveatevoscsieeve 4 126 990 System Additional Information sseeseeeseeeseeeeseeessseessresseessee 4 126 991 COS Additional Intormanon 4 131 992 CO Line Group Additional Intormaton ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 133 Section 5 List S1 Tone
38. 100 Flexible Numbering Outgoing message recording playing 215 Outgoing Message Time Feature References Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access Timed Reminder DISA Operation References Operator Service Features User Manual Outgoing Message OGM PAGING FEATURES SUMMARY Description Paging allows you to make a voice announcement to multiple persons at the same time Your message is announced over the built in speakers of proprietary telephones and or external speakers external pagers The paged person can answer your page from a nearby telephone Making and answering a page is 3 90 Features 3 Features P possible from either a proprietary or single line telephone You can do paging with a call on hold in order to transfer the call Paging and Transfer Paging features are classified as follows Paging All Paging External Paging Group Paging All Description Allows you to make a voice announcement from the speakers of the proprietary telephones and from the external paging devices external pagers If one of the paged persons answers your page you can talk to the person through the connected line Conditions e If System Connection is established paging is performed to all proprietary telephones and all external paging devices in both systems e The confirmation tone is sent to extensions when the page is made or answered Eliminating the tone is programmable e The confirmatio
39. 3 306 310 Excepted Code Table Entry Depending on the application enter the excepted codes in the associated tables You can use numeric characters and the wild card character Level 6 Excepted Code Table Location Code 1 911 2 1911 7 800 5 1800 Explanation If your Toll Restriction Level is 6 a You cannot make a call whose toll call number is 201 because the number whose second digit 0 is one of the Denied Codes for Level 6 b You can make a call whose toll call number is 800 Though the number whose second digit 0 is one of the Denied Codes for Level 6 the number 800 is one of the Excepted Codes for Level 6 The Excepted Codes override the Denied Codes Features 3 123 Features T 3 Flow Chart of The user makes a toll call Toll Restriction Is the call made by System Speed SE Dialing No No Is TRS Override for System lt Speed Dialing enabled Levels 7 8 What is the extension toll Level 1 restriction level a Levels 2 3 4 5 6 y No Is the dialed number found in gt applicable Denied Code Tables Yes Is the dialed number found in Yes applicable Excepted Code Tables wt No y The call is denied Reorder Tone is returned to the user The call is allowed 3 124 Features 3 Features T Conditions e Toll restriction checks
40. 4 5 6 7 8 9 The ability to forward a call to an outside party enable disable The ability to transfer a call to an outside party enable disable The ability to override Do Not Disturb of the called station enable disable Account Code Entry operation verified all calls verified toll restriction override option Executive Busy Override enable disable Executive Busy Override Deny enable disable Outgoing call restriction level Day mode Night mode 1 through 8 Restriction of CO call duration enable disable The number of permitted dialing digits during a CO call 10 The ability to set Call Forwarding Follow Me enable disable e A Class of Service can be assigned to a DISA user code Programming References Section 4 System Programming 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 503 Call Transfer to CO Line 504 Call Forwarding to CO Line 505 Executive Busy Override 506 Executive Busy Override Deny 507 Do Not Disturb Override 508 Account Code Entry Mode 601 Class of Service 811 DISA User Codes 991 COS Additional Information Feature References None Operation References Not applicable 3 38 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features C CO Line Connection Assignment Description Conditions This allows you to specify the CO lines connected
41. Accessory wire tie connector Hook pins Note When connecting a connector of the type shown below unscrew the lower hook pin too Then drive both accessory screws Gen Accessory screw q da i H Amphenol 57JE type 50 pin d d A vlt Accessory o screw connector l 2 60 Installation 2 5 DISA Card Installation 1 Insert upper side of the DISA Card into two by bal hooks on the main unit ld zs 2 2 Press two corners of the lower side of the g i S DISA Card 3 Connect the cord to the DISA Card Connector a DISA Card Programming References See Programming References in Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access Feature References Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 4 6 Remote Card Installation Sy 1 Insert upper side of the Remote Card into two hooks on the main unit 2 Press two corners of the lower side of the Remote Card 3 Connect the cord to the Remote Card Connector L Too A Remote Card Programming References Section 4 System Programming 107 System Password 813 Floating Number Assignment 814 Modem Standard Feat
42. Advancing to the next stage When SYS PGM NO gt is displayed you can select one of the following e To go to program 000 press the NEXT button e To go to another program enter the 3 digit program address Rotation of jack number Each jack of your Digital Super Hybrid System supports the connection of a digital proprietary telephone and an analog device with different extension numbers eXtra Device Port XDP function To program this function it is necessary to assign two parts for each jack The first part of jack one is 01 1 The second part of jack one is 01 2 The first part of jack two is 02 1 and so on The NEXT and PREV buttons can be used to move from jack to jack as required in programs 003 004 and 601 through 609 Example NEXT NEXT NEXT 141 a a 012 E wett HP PREV PREV PREV Note The first part of a jack is fora DPT of a XDP assigned jack The second part is for a single line device Program 600 EXtra Device Port assigns which jacks are XDP Storing your data Press STORE to store your data e The STORE indicator lights red and confirmation tone sounds Confirmation tone one beep After pressing STORE you will hear a beep This informs you that your storage is completed Alarm tone three beeps If you hear the alarm check that your entry is valid Making another selection within the same program address e To make the next higher selection press NEXT e To make the previous
43. BSS It depends on the telephone type used by the called party whether BSS or OHCA is activated by the operation If the called telephone is one of the following OHCA becomes active for KX TD816 KX T7235 for KX TD1232 T7130 KX T7235 Conditions This feature is only effective if the called extension has set the Call Waiting If this is not set the caller will hear reorder tone 3 86 Features 3 Features Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call waiting set cancel Section 3 Features Call Waiting DPT Features Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA One Touch Dialing Description Conditions One Touch Dialing offers the proprietary telephone PT user one touch access to a desired party or system feature This is enabled by storing an extension number a telephone number or a feature number of up to 16 digits on a One Touch Dialing button The number of buttons available depends on the type of PT One Touch Dialing buttons can be programmed to flexible buttons CO DSS or PF Programmable Feature e It is possible to store an account code into a One Touch Dialing button e Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing manual dialing Last Number Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used together e It is possible to store a number consisting of 17 digits or more by dividing it and storing it in two One Touch Dialing butto
44. CO line connected will continue to be seized To prevent this it is administrable to make CPC Signal Detection work on outgoing CO calls Note Some Central Offices may send CPC like signals during the dialing sequence and an attempt to make a call may be terminated If your CO does not send such signals it is recommended to make CPC Signal Detection work on outgoing CO calls If your Central Office does not send CPC like signals it is also effective to limit the dialed numbers during a call by the program 991 COS Additional Information on a Class of Service basis to prevent unauthorized calls If CPC Signal is detected during a Conference call the line is disconnected and the remaining two parties maintain the call If CPC Signal is detected during a call between a DISA caller and an extension or an outside party the line is disconnected Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set 991 COS Additional Information Field 1 None Operation References Not applicable Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 37 C Class of Service COS 3 Features Description COS is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of extensions Each extension is assigned a COS number Eight Classes of Service are available Conditions e A list of the programmable items is given below 1 2 3
45. Cable 50 lines To Extensions There are five kinds of dot for lines You can distinguish a line by the number of dot and the color ye E aea Ss O i 50 lines Aee sees sree SS SS SS Cr continuous 2 28 Installation Available for KX TD1232 only 2 3 4 Optional Extension Connection of Connection Chart KX A205 Clip Terminal This chart is used for the Panasonic cable KX A204 only black Pin Cable Clip Number Jack Pin Cable Clip Number Jack no Color no of Dot no no Color no of Dot no 26 orange red 1 1 T 41 orange red 31 4 T 1 orange black 2 1 R 16 orange black 32 4 R 27 yellow red 3 1 D1 1 9 17 42 yellow red 33 4 D1 6 14 22 2 yellow black 4 1 D2 or 25 17 yellow black 34 4 D2 or 30 28 green red 5 1 P1 43 green red 35 4 P1 3 green black 6 1 P2 18 green black 36 4 P2 29 grey red 7 1 T 44 grey red 37 4 T 4 grey black 8 1 R 19 grey black 38 4 R 30 white red 9 1 D1 2 10 18 45 white red 39 4 D1 7 15 23 5 white black 10 1 D2 or 26 20 white black 40 4 D2 or 31 31 orange red 11 2 Pl 46 orange red 41 C P1 6 orange black 12 2 P2 21 orange black 42 C P2 32 yellow red 13 2 T 47 yellow red 43 C T 7 yellow black 14 2 R 22 yellow black 44 C R 33 green red 15 2 D1 3 11 19 48 green red 4
46. Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Call Park Call Pickup CO Line Description Allows any extension user to answer an incoming CO call that is ringing at another s telephone Conditions e Call Pickup starts with the lowest CO number e Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call pickup CO line 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Call Pickup CO Line 3 30 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features C Call Pickup Directed Description Conditions Allows any extension user to answer a call ringing at any other extension e Doorphone calls can be picked up from extensions that are not programmed to answer doorphone calls e Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call pickup directed 990 System Additional Information Field 16 None DPT Features SLT Features Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Group Description Conditions Allows the extension user to answer a call that is ringing at an
47. Features Flexible Numbering 4 30 System Programming 4 3 System Programming Flexible Numbering contd 100 Feature Number List Number Feature Default 01 1st hundred extension block 1 02 _ 2nd hundred extension block 2 03 16 3rd through 16th hundred extension block None 17 Operator call 0 71 18 Automatic line access ARS 9 2 19 CO line group line access 8 20 _ System speed dialing x 21 Station speed dialing 3 22 Station speed dialing programming 30 23 Doorphone call 31 24 __ Paging external 32 25 Paging external answer TAFAS answer 42 26 Paging group 33 27 Paging group answer 43 28 Call pickup CO line A3 29 Call pickup group 40 30 Call pickup directed 41 31 Call hold 50 32 Call hold retrieve intercom 51 33 Call hold retrieve CO line 53 34 Last number redial 35 Call park call park retrieve 52 36 Account code entry 49 37 __ Door opener 55 38 External feature access 6 39 Station feature clear 790 40 Message waiting set cancel callback 70 41 Outgoing message recording playing 36 42 _ Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel 710 A3 _ Call pickup deny set cancel 720 44 Dap line security set cancel 730 45 Call waiting set cancel 731 46 Executive busy override deny set cancel 733 47 Pickup dialing program set cance
48. Jack 01 e Two doorphones can be installed in each system In the case of KX TD1232 Doorphones 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available e You can enter up to two for KX TD816 or four for KX TD1232 doorphone numbers for each extension Section 3 Features Door Opener Night Service Doorphone Call System Programming 4 109 609 4 8 Extension Programming Voice Mail Access Codes Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns a mailbox number for each extension only if program 990 System Additional Information Field 18 is set to free e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part e Mailbox number 16 digits max All jacks Not stored 1 Enter 609 Display Mailbox ID Code 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 Not Stored 4 Enter a mailbox number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01
49. LEF A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the system to the printer or personal computer A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of your printer or personal computer A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of your printer or personal computer e New line code CR LF CR CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed e Baud rate baud 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 e Word length bits 7 8 e Parity bit None Mark Space Even Odd e Stop bit length bits 1 2 New line code CR LF Baud rate 9600 Word length 8 Parity bit Mark Stop bit 1 Port 1 Port 2 1 Enter a program address 806 for Port 1 or 807 for Port 2 Display example RS232C Paramet 1 2 Press NEXT to program new line code Display example NL Code CR LF 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to program baud rate Display example Baud Rate 9600 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed System Programming 4 117 806 807 4 9 Resource Programming EIA RS 232C Parameters contd 7 Press STORE 8 Press NEXT to pr
50. Loop CO L CO button Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming cceccceecceeeeeeeeteeeeceteeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Feature References None Operation References Refer to respective operating instructions User Manual CALL FORWARDING FEATURES SUMMARY Description Call forwarding features enable you to have your calls forwarded to a specified destination You may specify the circumstances under which your calls are forwarded The following Call Forwarding features are available Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Call Forwarding Follow Me Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding to CO Line Call Forwarding All Calls Description This feature is used when you want all your calls to be automatically re directed to another extension Conditions e Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are CO calls DIL 1 1 DISA Intercept Routing Intercom calls Extension Transfer e There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding if a call is forwarded to an extension which is also in Call Forwarding In this case Station Hunting can be activated for the forwarded call Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 21 3 Features e Although calls are forwarded Message Waiting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the origina
51. PF Programmable Feature buttons The DSS Console must be programmed to work with a proprietary telephone PT System Programming assigns the jack numbers of the DSS Console and its associated PT Up to four consoles can be installed per system A PT can be paired with up to four DSS Consoles The paired telephone user can carry out the following operations using the DSS Console e Direct access to an extension Direct Station Selection e Quick access to an outside party One Touch Dialing e Easy transfer of a CO call to an extension The programmable One Touch Transfer feature provides simplified operation e Quick access to a system feature The above functions are enabled simply by pressing buttons on the console which were pre programmed as function buttons A DSS Console has two types of buttons as shown on the following page 3 58 Features 3 Features D DSS Console KX T7240 DSS buttons PF buttons DSS Direct Station Selection buttons Used to access extensions Every button is programmed to correspond to an extension Pressing a button allows the user to call the corresponding extension Every button is provided with an indicator Busy Lamp Field which shows the current state of the corresponding extension as shown in the Table below Light State of extension Off Idle On Busy Busy Lamp Field Tabl
52. Please see the following example which shows how to select a desired character For example to select the letter M Select either of the following two methods 1 Using the SHIFT and Soft buttons for display DPT only See Combination Table 1 1 Press 6 M belongs to 6 e The Function Line shows M N O 2 Press the Soft 1 M button Press SHIFT to display the lower case of the above letters 2 Using the SELECT button See Combination Table 2 1 Press 6 M belongs to 6 2 Press the SELECT button once e Pressing the SELECT button an appropriate number of times gives you the desired letter Pressing SELECT twice gives the letter m pressing three times gives N and so on Example of entering characters to enter Mike Using method 1 See Combination Table 1 The display shows 1 Enter 6 6 M N O 2 Press Soft 1 M M M N O 3 Enter 4 M4 G H T 4 Press SHIFT M4 Gj h al 5 Press Soft 3 i Mi g h al 6 Enter 5 VS J k 7 Press Soft 2 k Mik J k 1 8 Enter 3 MIKS d e ic 4 10 System Programming 4 1 3 Entering Characters 9 Press Soft 2 e Mike Using method 2 See Combination Table 2 The display shows Enter 6 Press SELECT Enter 4 Press SELECT six times Enter 5 Press SELECT four times Enter 3 Press SELECT four tim
53. Press STORE 5 Press END e Do not confuse this parameter with the CO to CO Call Duration Time Program 206 parameter e Program 206 CO to CO Call Duration Time is used to set the duration time allowed for a CO to CO call e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA 4 64 System Programming Available for KX TD1232 only 4 4 Timer Programming 215 Outgoing Message Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the maximum allowable recording time for outgoing messages OGM Time seconds 0 16 32 64 O no recording 32 0 32 0 for OGM 1 through 4 from left to right 1 Enter 215 Display OGM Time 2 Press NEXT to program the time for OGM 1 Display example OGM 32 0 32 0 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press to program the time for OGM 2 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program the time for OGM s 3 and 4 7 Press STORE 8 Press END e There are three messages available OGM 1 used for DISA message 1 OGM 2 used for DISA message 2 OGM 3 used for Timed Reminder OGM 4 reserved select 0 for OGM 4 e Enter the times starting from the left for OGM 1 to OGM 4 e The total time of the outgoing messages cannot exceed 64 seconds Section 3 Features Direct Inward
54. Programming ccccccccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Feature References Section 3 Features Button Group CO G CO CO Line Group CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Outward Dialing Line Access CO Line Group Line Access Direct Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to select a CO line by pressing an idle CO button which automatically establishes handsfree operation mode and allows the user to perform On Hook Dialing The user need not press the SP PHONE button MONITOR button nor lift the handset Conditions e There are three types of CO buttons which can be programmed on an extension Single CO button Group CO button and Loop CO button e Each extension is subject to System Programming items for CO lines available to access Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 211 Dial Start Time 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming cccccccceseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Loop CO L CO Button Single CO S CO Button Feature References Section 3 Features Button Group CO G CO CO Line Connection Assignment Button Loop CO L CO Outgoing Button Si
55. Put the inside cover back on the main unit and secure the screws 2 62 Installation Available for KX TD816C 1232C and KX TD816HK 1232HK only 2 4 7 Caller ID Card Installation KX TD1232 1 Loosen nine screws to open the inside cover of the main unit Note If any cards units or cords are installed to the main unit remove them beforehand 2 Attach the Caller ID Card s to the CO Line Card fitting the connectors Up to two cards can be installed to the initial CO Line Card m CO Line Card f i d CALLER ID 1 1 f ae ON a a y ga Gi 4 ts p d ee aT Coes o on DC ER EN E e CH a T I f I I I eme CALLER ID pl 4 O g e e p H o H S ol Caller ID Cards o o OO St l T 000000000000000 000000000000000 z 900000000000000 900000000000000 P ooo0o000000000000 U 000000000000000 o900000000000000 E D ooo0o0o00000000000 200000000000000 EG ES Inside cover 3 Put the inside cover back on t
56. SLT Features Doorphone Call Your system supports two doorphones If a visitor presses the doorphone button pre assigned extensions are rung The extension who answers the call can talk to the visitor It is possible for any extension user to originate a call to a doorphone e It is needed to install a Doorphone Card and a Doorphone These are options e Two doorphones can be installed on each system System Connection provides for four doorphones e It is necessary to program the extensions that can receive calls from each doorphone during day and night mode e If no extension user answers an incoming doorphone call within 30 seconds the call stops ringing and is cancelled e While engaged on a doorphone call any extension user can open the door from the telephone to let the visitor in Door Opener This requires a user supplied door opener Section 2 Installation 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 57 D 3 Features Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Doorphone call 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Feature References Section 3 Features Door Opener Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Doorphone Call DsS Console KX T7240 KX T7040 Description The Direct Station Selection DSS Console provides direct access to stations and busy lamp display as well as providing 16
57. Starting the System for the First Time Set the Power Switch to the OFF position Set the System Clear Switch to the CLEAR position Plug the AC power cord into the system and an AC outlet Turn the Power Switch on Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool The power indicator will flash 6 Slide the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL position while the power indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds an amp WN The system will be initialized with default values The system will also check the CO lines extensions and optional cards and units KX TD816 Reset Button System Clear Switch Q cat RESET NORMAL CLEAR gt To AC Outlet Power Indicator Power Switch 2 76 Installation 2 6 Starting the System for the First Time KX TD1232 System Clear Switch SYSTEM CLEAR CLEAR NORMAL RESET A Reset Button e LJ v i SS seh To AC Outlet Switch Power Indicator Notice e After pressing the Reset Button slide the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL position at step 6 while the power indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds Otherwise the system does not start up with the default values CAUTION Once you start up the
58. TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 all CO lines e Enable detection Disable no detection Default Disable Programming 1 Enter 415 Display CPC Outgoing Asn 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Some central offices CO may send CPC like signals during the dialing sequence and an attempt to make a call may be terminated If your CO is such a type select Disable e Program 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set is used to set CPC Signal Detection Time e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the X key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 Feature References Section 3 Features Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Direct Inward System Access DISA Available for KX TD1232 only System Programming 4 9 416 4 5 CO Line Programming Reverse Circuit Assignment Description Enables or disables to detect Reverse Circuit Se
59. The following procedures can be used to install either 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 or 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 for KX TD816 The model numbers of the main units and expansion units to be used are shown below e 4 CO Line Unit Main Unit Expansion Unit KX TD816BX HK ML KX TD180D 4 pin Connector KX TD816C NL NZ KX TD180 Modular Connector e 8 Station Line Unit Main Unit Expansion Unit KX TD816BX HK ML KX TD170D 6 pin Connector KX TD816C NL NZ KX TD170 Amphenol Connector The following steps 1 through 5 and 7 through 10 are common to both expansion units The step 6 shows two different methods to install respective expansion units 1 Loosen two screws on the cover plate Insert fingers into the slits to remove the cover plate Slit Note There are two cover plates Any of them can be removed as needed 2 Connect the cabinet cord to the connector in the main unit firmly Geer Wei JIT 3 Hook the cabinet on the main unit and slide the cabinet to the left until it is fixed 4 Loosen the outside screw and slide the cover to the right
60. Toll Restriction Override for Carrier Access System Speed Dialing Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry Operation References Not applicable Features 3 125 T 3 Features Toll Restriction for Special Carrier Access Description Conditions If your system has access to multiple telephone companies access to a specific company requires a carrier access code preceding the telephone number Toll Restriction on these calls is enabled by storing the carrier codes 20 at a maximum If a stored carrier code is found in the dialed number a toll restriction check starts for the succeeding telephone number A carrier access code is followed by Automatic Pause Insertion It is possible to select the pause time in System Programming Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 311 Special Carrier Access Codes 412 Pause Time Section 3 Features Toll Restriction Operation References Not applicable Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry Description Conditions Allows the extension user to override toll restriction temporarily to make a toll call from a toll restricted telephone The user can carry out this feature by entering the appropriate account code before dialing the telephone number e The toll restriction level of the user is changed to level 2 by this feature Thus this can be used by extension users assigned a toll restriction level from 3 through 6 T
61. ZZ LL To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office For details refer to Section 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer E If KX TD170D is to be installed for KX TD816BX HK ML Insert required telephone wires into the Insert the plug into a jack on the unit holes in a plug Connect a ground wire to the ground Fix the transparent part into the black part terminal on the 8 Station Line Unit in Note Do not peel off the coating of the wires order to ground Jack for Power Insert the wires to the ends Failure Transfer Jack Jack no Lr 6 pin plug A oO Ges b SC X Ta Ground To extensions Terminal Jack 9 16 t For details refer to Section 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer 2 52 Installation 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 E If KX TD170 is to be installed for KX TD816C NL NZ Insert the connector into the jack Jack for Power Failure Transfer f Connector type k 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or the equivalent Gans KS e fa VH gt To extensions Jacks 9 16 t For details refer to Section 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer Notes e For Cable Pin Numbers to Be Connected see page 2 24 e For fixing the connec
62. a Consultation Hold e During CO calls a FLASH stored in System Speed Dialing Station Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing or Call Forwarding to CO Line functions as External Feature Access not as Flash Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering External feature access 413 Flash Time 990 System Additional Information Field 3 Section 3 Features Flash Host PBX Access DPT Features SLT Features External Feature Access EXtra Device Port XDP Description Conditions Connection References EXtra Device Port XDP expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension jack to contain two telephones A digital proprietary telephone DPT and a single line telephone SLT can be connected to the same jack but have different extension numbers so that they can act as completely different extensions e XDP requires previous programming of the individual jack Enable XDP mode for the desired jack by System Programming Immediately after changing the assignment changed setting may not work for a maximum of eight seconds e If an analog proprietary telephone APT and SLT are connected to an XDP enabled jack neither telephones work e If XDP is disabled for the jack DPT and SLT may be used as Paralleled Telephones APT and SLT also can be used as Paralleled Telephones Section 2 Installatio
63. cases and results for DISA calls CO call is made DISA Delayed Timer starts U The caller reaches the DISA line Yes Intercept Routing starts All resources Is IRNA are busy employed Kept waiting with ringback tone No Making an One of the resources is extension call Ki IsIRNA available Outgoing employed Message is sent TAFAS Yes No The call is accepted y lli ee G Intercept Idle modem x Routing starts Busy Making a gp CO call No Answer Busy Timer starts Idle we y No Is User Code accepted or unnecessary KSE Disconnected after 10 seconds l Yes The call is accepted Features 3 51 D 3 Features Display Call Information Description The display proprietary telephone shows the user the following call information Extension number and name These are shown when calling or when called by an extension user and during an established intercom call A display example 123 Smith Dialed telephone number This is shown when dialing the telephone number A display example 91234567890 Number or name of the caller These are shown if the Caller ID feature is available Display examples CO 03 1234567890 CO 03 Panasonic CO Line number This is shown when receiv
64. connected to an idle line An idle line is automatically selected from the pre assigned lines 2 No Line Preference No line is selected when you go off hook You must select a line to make a call 3 Prime Line Preference When you go off hook you are connected to the pre assigned line Assign a line as your prime line beforehand Conditions e Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting e To set Prime Line Preference one prime line is selected from intercom or CO lines e The CO lines used by users must be connected by programming e To select Idle Line Preference CO lines available for the user should be programmed Also CO lines available for Automatic Line Access should be assigned 3 80 Features 3 Features L e The user can override the Idle Prime Line Preference temporarily to select a specific line To select it press the desired line access button INTERCOM or CO button before going off hook or pressing the SP PHONE MONITOR button or if Full One Touch Dialing is enabled press One Touch Dialing DSS REDIAL or SAVE button Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 103 Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming 0 cceccceecceseeeeeeteeeeeeteeneees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G C
65. day The starting time of the Day Night mode can be set for each day Features 3 85 O 3 Features Manual Night Service If you select manual switching mode Operator 1 can switch the Day Night mode by dialing the feature number Conditions The following programming items may be assigned in a different way between day mode and night mode 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Night service mode set cancel 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode 102 Day Night Service Starting Time Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Night Service Operator Service Features Night Service On Off Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Description OHCA allows you to inform a busy extension that another call is waiting by talking through the built in speaker of the called party s proprietary telephone If the existing call is using the handset the second conversation is made with the speakerphone so that the called party can talk to two parties independently OHCA is performed the same way as Busy Station Signaling
66. does not answer within the transfer recall time the call will return to the user or Operator 1 You can select the desired one by system programming e This function is possible when the destination is sending ringback or busy tone If the destination is busy Camp On Transfer occurs e The ringing signal pattern follows the regular ringing pattern depending on the party being transferred CO or extension call ringing e It is possible for any extension user to transfer a call to the floating modem e If music on hold is enabled music is sent to the caller while being transferred It is system programmable whether to send ringback tone or music on hold to the caller by program 990 Field 1 Programming References Section 4 System Programming 201 Transfer Recall Time 990 System Additional Information Fields 1 11 3 34 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Feature References Operation References User Manual Call Waiting Description Conditions Tone 1 Tone 2 CO Intercom Features C None DPT Features SLT Features Call Transfer to Extension While in conversation a call waiting tone informs the user of another incoming call that is waiting He or she can answer the second call by disconnecting or placing the current call on hold Call waiting tone can be enabled or disabled by dialing the appropriate feature number e The call waiting tone is generated when a CO cal
67. flashing button Programming References Feature References Operation References Section 4 System Programming 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night Section 3 Features Direct In Lines DIL Not applicable 7 Available for KX TD816BX and KX TD1232DBX DxX only Features 3 101 7 Available for KX TD1232 only R S 3 Features Ringing Discriminating Description Allows the extension user to identify the incoming call by the ringing pattern See Section 5 1 Tone Ring Tone Conditions e When there are multiple incoming calls and the extension goes from off hook to on hook the calls are rung according to the following priority lt 1 gt Consultation Hold Recall lt 2 gt An incoming call from a line in which the Prime Line Preference Incoming function has been set with a proprietary telephone only lt 3 gt Call Waiting lt 4 gt Incoming calls Hold Recall Transfer Recall Unattended Conference Recall e If multiple incoming calls arrive at an on hook extension simultaneously priority as to which calls should be rung is generally on a first come first served basis In the case of proprietary telephones PT however when the Prime Line Preference Incoming function has been set this line takes precedence e Incoming TAFAS calls can be identified by ringing signals sent out from external pager The ringing pattern is the same as the CO calls e The digital PT use
68. groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 e Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign each CO line to a CO line group Section 3 Features Intercept Routing Available for KX TD1232 only System Programming 4 85 411 4 5 CO Line Programming Host PBX Access Codes Description Selection Default Programming Assigns Host PBX or Centrex access codes If the system is installed behind a host PBX or a Centrex system an access code is required to make a CO Centrex call or to access Centrex features Up to four codes can be stored for a CO line group assigned the line e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 x all CO line groups e Access code 1 or 2 digits four different entries max All CO line groups Not stored 1 Enter 411 Display TRG Host PBX NO A Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt A Enter a CO line group number To enter CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 F 7 j 4 Enter an access code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new access code Display example TRG1 01 5 To enter more access codes for the same CO line group press and enter the access codes until all the required entries are completed Display example TRG1 01 08 10 22 6 Press STORE 7 To
69. in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb functions if any e A Floating Station cannot be programmed as the forwarded destination Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible Button Assignment 3 22 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features C Feature References Operation References User Manual Call Forwarding Description Conditions 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding Do not disturb set cancel Station Programming cceccceeceeeeeeeeeteeeeceteeeaeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button None DPT Features SLT Features Call Forwarding Busy Busy No Answer Your calls are forwarded to another extension if your extension is busy or you do not answer the call in a pre determined time e Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are CO calls DIL 1 1 DISA Intercept Routing Intercom calls Extension Transfer e This function operates the same way as Call Forwarding Busy and Call Forwarding No Answer e There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding if a call is forwarded to a station which is also in Call Forwarding In this case Station Hunting is activated for the forwarded call e Although calls are forward
70. in any part or ending with 9 are invalid as 99 is used as a delimiter when entering an account code Section 3 Features Account Code Entry Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry 4 36 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to enable or disable hunting and set the Station Hunting type for each extension group There are four Station Hunting types available Circular Termination Voice Mail VM and Automated Attendant AA If circular hunting is assigned for a group all the extensions in the group are hunted until an idle one is found If termination hunting is assigned hunting stops at the extension which has the largest jack number in the group If VM hunting is assigned all the VM ports of an extension group are hunted until an idle one is found to permit Voice Mail Service If AA hunting is assigned all the AA ports of an extension group are hunted until an idle one is found to permit AA Service e Extension group number 1 through 8 x all extension groups e Disable no hunting Terminate termination Circular VM voice mail AA automated attendant All extension groups Disable 1 Enter 106 Display Call Hunting 2 Press NEXT Display EXT GRP NO gt 3 Enter an extension group number To enter extension group number 1 you can also press NEX
71. is different from that for CO 2 42 Installation 2 3 11 Installation of Lightning Protectors Installation of an Earth Rod Lightning Protector CO Grounding Wire Main Unit Underground Earth Rod 1 Installation location of the earth rod Near the protector 2 Check obetrucpong None 3 Composition of the earth rod oo eee Metal 4 Depth of the earth mod More than 50 cm 20 inches 5 Size of the grounding wire Thickness is more than 16 AWG Notes e The above figures are recommendations only e The length of earth rod and the required depth depend on the composition of the soil Installation 2 43 2 3 11 Installation of Lightning Protectors Installation of the KX A207 1 Secure the protector to a building with the enclosed mounting screws 2 Remove about 1 cm 13 32 inch of insulation from the end of the earth wire Insert the earth wire through the bottom of the protector base and secure it to the earth terminal 3 Remove about 1 5 cm 19 32 inch of insulation from the ends of the external and internal cables then pass the cables through the rubber packing 4 Fold the external and internal cables and connect them to the terminal screws using washers 5 Secure the exter
72. job much easier Section 3 Features DSS Console KX T7240 KX T7040 System Programming 4 27 008 4 2 Manager Programming Absent Messages Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to program the absent messages An absent message if set by the station user is displayed on the calling extension s telephone to show the reason for the user s absence e Message number 1 through 9 e Message 16 characters max 1 Will Return Soon 5 Out Until 2 Gone Home 6 In a Meeting 3 At Ext 7 through 9 Blank not stored 4 Back at 1 Enter 008 Display Message Asn 2 Press NEXT Display MSG NO gt 3 Enter a message number To enter message number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example MSG1 Will Return 4 Enter the message For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new message 5 Press STORE To program another message press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired message number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of nine messages Messages 1 through 6 are programmed at the factory but can be changed Each message has a maximum of 16 characters You can enter a maximum of seven characters per message which can be programmed at each user s station The station user ca
73. keep pressing them until the desired one is displayed If you press SELECT 4 12 System Programming 4 1 4 Example of Programming Sample of Description Explanation and the desired speed dial number the selected code is displayed 4 2 Manager Programming 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set contd 17 You can continue to program another entry 18 After you have stored all your entries finish this program by pressing END After pressing END you can go to any program address you desire You can return to the Initial Message mode any time by pressing END 19 Conditions e There is a maximum of 100 speed dial numbers Each speed dial number has a maximum of 24 digits The valid characters are 0 through 9 and keys FLASH PAUSE SECRET and hyphen buttons To go to the next lager program address do not press END but press Soft 1 SKP or Feature References Section 3 Features Special Features for KX T7235 System Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing VOLUME V To go to the next smaller program address do not press END but press SHIFT Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME A 19 Tells you what you should notice or consider when doing the programming 20 Lists all of the features related to the programming These features are described in Section 3 Programming Structure Program Address Programming Group Description 000 008 Manager Programming These
74. line group requires digit modification designate a digit modification table number from 1 through 8 This table is required to have the system automatically add a specific carrier access code to the user dialed number Example Program 322 Route Plan Table 1 Time A Time B Time C Time D COG Modify COG Modify COG Modify COG Modify Priority 1 T Deo XD 1 1 Priority2 1 1 SSES E Priority 3 SEN 1 1 3 2 3 Table 5 COG CO Line Group Modify Modification Table Number 3 8 Features 3 Features A Step 5 Make up the Digit Modification Table Carriers E F and G match CO line groups and Modification Tables as follows and have the following Access Code Carrier COG Mod Table Access Code E 1 1 1 0 333 F S 2 1 0 555 G 3 3 1 0 666 Table 6 According to Table 6 enter the Access Codes in the respective Modification Tables using the programs 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit and 331 ARS Modify Added Number as follows Example Program 330 Digit Modification Tables Modification Table 1 Modification Table 2 Modification Table 3 Remove 0 Add 10333 Enter the number of the Remove 0 Remove 0 digits to be deleted Add 10555 Add 10666 lt Enter the digits to be added Feature References Operation References User Manual Eventually if Modification Table 1 is applied the user di
75. line number or keep pressing or lt until the desired CO line is displayed To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END 4 106 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night contd Conditions Feature References e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 e To assign all jacks or all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 or 4 In these cases the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 or COO1 e To assign no CO line group for a station press CLEAR at step 4 Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Night Service System Programming 4 107 607 608 4 8 Extension Programming Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Description Selection Default Programming These programs assign the extensions which will ring when a doorphone call is received during the day and night modes Programmed extensions are also allowed to open
76. position Take that extension and plug it into another extension port that is working If the telephone does not work replace the phone Improper reset operation Press the Reset Button Noise in external paging Induced noise on the wire between the system and the amplifier Use a shielded cable as the connection wire between the system and amplifier A short shielded cable is recommended Volume distortion from external music source Excessive input level from external music source Decrease the output level of the external music source by using the volume control on the music source Speed Dialing or One Touch Dialing does not function Bad programming Enter the CO line access number 9 0 81 through 88 into program ming 6 2 Troubleshooting 6 1 Troubleshooting 6 1 2 Connection Connection between the KX TD816 KX TD1232 and a proprietary telephone No CAUSE SOLUTION Can you dial gt The T R is connected to the D1 D2 Use the correct cord inner 2 an extension g wires are for T R and the Die D1 outer 2 wires are for D1 D2 Te Le R o e R Die r e D2 KX TD816 extension KX TD1232 The P1 P2 is connected to the D1 D2 Use the correct cord 2 wires second from the outside for rt pe es E a D1 D2 and the outer 2 wires Te eT are for P1 P2 Re R P2 e e Te P KX TD12
77. programs may be accessed by the system manager of the customer to meet frequent changes requested by the customer 100 116 System Programming Entire system programming 200 215 Timer Programming Flexible system timer setting 300 331 TRS ARS Programming Assignment of Toll Restriction and ARS 400 416 CO Line Programming Setting of CO line and CO line Group values 500 508 COS Programming Setting of Class of Service COS 600 609 Extension Programming Setting of extension values 800 814 Resource Programming Assignment of customer supplied peripherals connected to the system 990 992 Option Programming Used to answer the user s requirements or troubles if needed System Programming 4 13 000 4 2 Manager Programming Date and Time Set NOTICE It is assumed that you have read Section 4 1 General Programming Instructions The use of the soft buttons is discussed in the section therefore we will not make any reference to them in the following instructions At any time the soft buttons can be used in place of the overlay keys Description Selection Default Programming Sets the current date and time e Year 00 through 99 e Month Jan through Dec e Day 1 through 31 e Day of the week SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT e Hour 1 through 12 e Minute 00 through 59 e AM P
78. ring delay 3 3 rings delay 4 6 rings delay 5 No ring only the indicator flashes 6 Disable no incoming call When you change the jack number by pressing NEXT or PREV the CO line number is not changed Example 03 1 CO06 Press NEXT 03 2 CO06 Section 3 Features Direct In Lines DIL Night Service Ringing Delayed System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer System Programming 4 105 605 606 4 8 Extension Programming Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Determines the CO lines which can be accessed by an extension in both day and night modes The extension users can make outgoing CO calls using the assigned CO lines e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 x all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Enabl enable Disab disable All jacks 1 2 all CO lines Enable Day Night 1 Enter a program address 605 for day or 606 for night Display example CO Out Day 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 CO01 Enabl 4 Enter the desired CO
79. the door e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e Doorphone number KX TD816 1 and 2 two entries max KX TD1232 1 through 4 four entries max Jack 01 1 All doorphones Other jacks no doorphone Day Night 1 Enter a program address 607 for day or 608 for night Display example Doorphone in Day 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 1234 4 Enter the doorphone numbers To assign no doorphone press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new doorphone numbers 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END 4 108 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night conta Conditions Feature References e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 e To assign all jacks to one selection press the X key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for
80. the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 COS1 4 Enter a COS number To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of eight Classes of Service Every extension must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the COS Programming of programs 500 through 508 and 991 e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 e To assign all jacks to one COS press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 e Program 811 DISA User Codes is also used to assign a Class of Service to a DISA User Code Section 3 Features Class of Service COS 4 102 System Programming Available for KX TD1232 only 4 8 Extension Programming 602 Extension Group Assignment Description Assigns each extension to an extension group Extension groups are used for Group Call Pickup Station Hunting and Paging Group This program is also used to assign all Voice Mail ports Automated Attendant ports of your Voice Processing System i
81. the terminal box using a 4 conductor modular connector 2 Connect the wires of doorphone 1 to the red and green screws of the terminal box 3 Connect the wires of doorphone 2 to the yellow and black screws of the terminal box del Terminal Box A Doorphone 2 KX T30865 KX T30865 Yellow H Su Black Red DE Green EI En fi ml 4 conductor wiring is required Doorphone 1 KX T30865 Terminal Box Doorphone 2 KX T30865 00000 Installation 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Connecting Door Openers 1 Loosen the screw to remove the cover 3 Insert the wires coming from the door openers into holes and tighten the screws d a Ier m To door S 4G i opener 2 2 T To door opener 1 cs 3 5 il aii Notes e For
82. to your system to prevent an extension user from originating a CO call by selecting a line which is not connected An idle line is selected from the connected ones when an extension user makes an Automatic Line Access e If the user tries to make a call with a disconnected line reorder tone sounds to indicate that the line is out of use e This is effective for all outgoing calls including DISA Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 400 CO Line Connection Assignment None Operation References Not applicable CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Description Conditions Allows you to assign the CO line an extension user can use for outgoing calls This feature is useful to prevent unauthorized toll calls e When an extension user tries to make a CO call on a disallowed CO line reorder tone is sent to indicate that the user cannot use the CO line e Day and Night Service are individually programmed Night Service Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night None Operation References Not applicable Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 39 C Co Line Group Description Conditions 3 Features CO lines can be grouped into up to eight CO line groups for example WATS DDD FX services etc This allows extensions to call outside parties without design
83. 0 Display ARS Modify Remov 2 Press NEXT Display Modify Table gt 3 Enter a modification table number To enter table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 0 4 Enter the number of digits to be deleted To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another modification table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired modification table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions There is a maximum of eight Modification Tables Each table has a 1 digit number of digits to be deleted Feature References Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS System Programming 4 75 331 4 5 TRS ARS Programming ARS Modify Added Number Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Determines how the dialed number should be modified before sending to the central office Digits are added to the beginning of the dialed number e Modification table number 1 through 8 e Number to be added 20 digits max All modification tables Not stored 1 Enter 331 Display ARS Modify Add 2 Press NEXT Display Modify Table gt 3 Enter a modification table number To enter table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 4 Enter the number to be added To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press
84. 00 1000 ms SC E 1 for the other systems Explanation for Areas 3 and 4 Field Description Selection Default References 23 This field is provided to assign PAD Switch 0 0dB 0 None Control volume control of received calls ona 1 3 dB CO line This can be assigned per CO line The CO numbers 1 through 8 correspond to CO lines 1 through 8 for KX TD816 and CO numbers 1 through 24 correspond to CO lines 1 through 24 for KX TD1232 respectively 24 Prevents or allows a call originated by an AA 0 prevent 0 Voice Mail port of VPS to another AA port 1 allow Integration 25 Prevents or allows sending pulse dialing signals 0 prevent 1 None during a CO call 1 allow System Programming 4 129 990 4 10 Option Programming System Additional Information conta Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References e Area code 01 area 1 02 area 2 03 area 3 04 area 4 e Field number 1 through 22 26 for areas 1 and 2 23 through 25 for areas 3 and 4 e Selection See Selection shown above for each area See Default shown above L Enter 990 Display System Add Inf 2 Press NEXT Display Area NO gt 3 Enter an area code 01 through 04 Display example 0010100011000001 4 Keep pressing lt or to move the cursor to the desired field 5 Enter your selection 0 or 1 To change the current entry press STORE and
85. 00 a m 1 00 p m 2 1 00 p m 6 00 p m 3 6 00 p m 7 00 a m To program the time zones above use the program 313 ARS Time Four time zones Time A Time B Time C Time D are provided here Enter the starting hour for each zone Features 3 7 3 Features Example Program Address 313 ARS Time Table Time Zones Entry Time A 7 00 a m e a Enter the starting time of Time B 1 00 p m each zone If a zone is Time C 6 00 Pay not necessary select Time D Disable Disable Table 3 Step 4 Determine the priority of the CO line groups in each time zone The table below shows the carrier and CO line groups selected for each priority and time zone Time A Time B Time C 7 00 13 00 13 00 18 00 18 00 7 00 Least Costly Carrier CO Line Group Priority 1 Carrier F Group 2 Carrier F Group 2 Carrier E Group 1 Next Less Costly Carrier CO Line Group Priority 2 Carrier E Group 1 Carrier G Group 3 Carrier F Group 2 Most Costly Carrier Carrier G Group 3 Carrier E Group 1 Carrier G Group 3 CO Line Group Priority 3 Table 4 To have the system use the priorities shown above use one of the programs 322 through 329 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 Route Plan Tables 1 through 8 As we have already selected Leading Digit Table 1 select Route Plan Table 1 Enter the CO line group numbers in priority order If the specified CO
86. 01 01 123456789012345678901234567890 00 05 12 1234567890 06 24 93 10 07AM 103 20 lt INCOMING gt 00 00 56 06 24 93 10 08AM 104 10 lt INCOMING gt 00 00 20 431211 06 24 93 10 08AM 105 10 lt INCOMING gt 00 10 01 431211 TR 06 24 93 10 09AM 28 14 10222P1 202 346 7890 00 09 18 001 FW 06 24 93 10 10AM 103 20 lt INCOMING gt 00 01 24 06 24 93 10 11AM 280 12 lt INCOMING gt 00 00 24 06 24 93 10 11AM 280 22 0924312111 00 03 02 DI 06 24 93 10 20AM 120 13 lt INCOMING gt 4312111 00 21 46 RM a 2 3 4 5 6 OI 8 3 108 Features 3 Features S Example of SMDR printout format Explanation 1 Date shows the date of the call as Month Day Year 2 Time shows the end time of a call as Hour Minute AM or PM 3 Ext shows the extension number floating number etc that engaged in a call 4 CO shows the CO line number used for the call 5 Dial Number Outgoing call shows the other party s telephone number maximum 30 digits Valid digits are 0 through 9 P if PAUSE button is pressed or the mark if a host PBX access code is entered Received call shows lt INCOMING and if a Caller ID is assigned to the other party also shows the name or number 6 Duration shows the duration of the call as Hours Minutes Seconds 7 Acc Code Account Code shows the account code appended to the call 8 CD Condition Code shows call handling type with the following codes TR Transfer FW Call Fo
87. 1 4 CO Line Unit Area 2 8 Station Line Unit Installation 2 45 2 4 1 Location of Optional Cards and Units KX TD1232 One 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 and or up to two 8 Station Line Units KX TD170 can be installed to any of the three expansion areas bi A ENT usuRER YARD SYSTEM J l 8 Station Line Units JA o ooo e sc KX TD170 Each unit adds eight extensions Up to two units can be installed ES 1 EXT seen 5 b 4 CO E J 4 CO Line RoE Sangre Unit KX TD180 E P ij Adds four i CO lines Expansion Unit E Gi d Connectors Remove the cover plate s on the front cover Note System Programming is required for expansion unit location Refer to Section 4 3 109 Expansion Unit Type Default Area 1 4 CO Line Unit Area 2 and 3 8 Station Line Unit 2 46 Installation 2 4 1 Location of Optional Cards and Units Backup Battery and Adaptor Card Doorphone Card for KX TWP816 Doorphone Card Connector Backup Battery Connector Front Cover is open
88. 11 2 0s 9 Assigns whether the system or the VPS 0 system 0 e Message turns off the Message Waiting lamp when 1 VPS Waiting the user hears a message recorded in a e Voice Mail mailbox Integration 10 Assigns whether the system starts the 0 do not start 0 Voice Mail Automated Attendant Service or not if a CO 1 start Integration call is directed to VPS by Call Forwarding or Intercept Routing If start is assigned the AA SVC code programmed in program 114 is transmitted to the voice mail port and the Follow On ID function does not work System Programming 4 127 990 4 10 Option Programming System Additional Information conta Field Description Selection Default References 1 If an outside party is transferred and unanswered assigns whether Transfer Recall occurs at the transfer originating extension or at Operator 1 extension Operator 1 0 Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension 12 If Limited Call Duration is enabled in program 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit assigns if Limited Call Duration is done for both outgoing and incoming calls or for outgoing calls only both calls outgoing calls only Limited Call Duration 13 Allows you to remove confirmation tone 4 By default a beep tone sounds when a three party conference is started ended disable enable Confirmation Tone
89. 16 Jack 01 1 through 16 1 101 through 116 Jack 01 2 through 16 2 201 through 216 e KX TD1232 Jack 01 1 through 64 1 101 through 164 Jack 01 2 through 64 2 201 through 264 004 Extension Name Set Not Stored 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e KX TD816 CO Buttons 1 through 8 of All Jacks Single CO 01 through 08 ringing tone type 2 e KX TD1232 CO Buttons through 24 of All Jacks Single CO 01 through 24 ringing tone type 2 006 Operator Manager Extension Operator 1 Jack 01 Assignment Operator 2 and Manager Unassigned 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Not Stored Telephone Assignment 008 Absent Messages 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext 2 4 Back at 5 Out Until 6 In a Meeting 7 through 9 Not Stored System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering See page 4 31 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode Manual 102 Day Night Service Starting Time Every Day of the Week Day 9 00 am Night 5 00 pm 103 Automatic Access CO Line Group 12345678 Assignment 105 Account Codes Not Stored 106 Station Hunting Type All Extension Groups Disable 107 System Password 1234 108 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Enable 109 Expansion Unit Type e KX TD816 CIR e KX TD1232 Master and Slave C1 E1 E2 110 Caller ID Code Set Not Stored 5 4 List 5 2 Default Values Address Program Default 111 Caller ID Name Set Not Stored
90. 16 starts with 4 CO line and 8 extension jacks The KX TD1232 starts with 8 CO line and 16 extension jacks They can be expanded by installing expansion units e A 4 CO Line Unit adds 4 CO line jacks e A 8 Station Line Unit adds 8 extension jacks The KX TD816 can have one 4 CO Line Unit and one 8 Station Line Unit The KX TD1232 can have one 4 CO Line Unit and a maximum of two 8 Station Line Units Thus the KX TD816 can have 4 or 8 CO line jacks and 8 or 16 extension jacks and the KX TD1232 can have 8 or 12 CO line jacks and 16 24 or 32 extension jacks Conditions e The number of extension jacks may be different from the number of telephones if the Paralleled Telephone or the eXtra Device Port feature is enabled These features allow one extension jack to have two telephones e When an expansion unit is installed the unit identification is set by System Programming Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 2 4 CO Line Unit Connection 2 4 3 8 Station Line Unit Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 109 Expansion Unit Type Feature References Section 3 Features EXtra Device Port XDP Paralleled Telephone Operation References Not applicable 3 84 Features 3 Features M N Music on Hold Description While a party is on hold music is automatically sent Conditions e Operations such as Call Hold Exclusive Call Hold Consultation Hold or Call Transfer generates Music on Hold Th
91. 2Xs e In this Installation Manual the expansion unit KX TD170D KX TD180D are all described as KX TD170 KX TD180 except necessary cases e There are some features and models available for certain types of KX TD816 or KX TD1232 models In that case those manual describes each time what is available for which model Precaution e Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such as fluorescent lamps motors and television These noise sources can interfere with the performance of the Digital Super Hybrid System e This unit should be kept free of dust moisture high temperature more than 40 C 104 F and vibration and should not be exposed to direct sunlight e Never attempt to insert wires pins etc into the vents or other holes of this unit e If there is any trouble disconnect the unit from the telephone line Plug the telephone directly into the telephone line If the telephone operates properly do not reconnect the unit to the line until the trouble has been repaired If the telephone does not operate properly chances are that the trouble is in the telephone system and not in the unit e Do not use benzine thinner or the like or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet Wipe it with a soft cloth WARNING THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVICED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS BECOMING ACCESIBLE DISCONNECT THE
92. 3 If Account button is pressed the display shows Account 4 If FWD DND button is pressed the selected feature assigned on the button is shown as follows a If the Do Not Disturb feature is assigned Do Not Disturb b If Call Forwarding All Calls to extension 123 is assigned FWDCAL Extl23 c If Call Forwarding Busy to extension 234 is assigned FWD BSY Ext234 d If Call Forwarding No Answer to extension 345 is assigned FWDUWNA Ext345 e If Call Forwarding Busy No Answer to extension 100 is assigned FWD B NA Ext100 f If Call Forwarding To CO Line number 91201431 is assigned FWD CO 91201431 e If the display characters exceed 16 digits the mark amp is shown at the right hand edge e This is used to display the data programmed for each PF Programmable Feature DSS SAVE or REDIAL button If Full One Touch Dialing is enabled on the telephone Full One Touch Dialing will be active instead Features 3 53 D 3 Features Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Display Self Extension Number Description Allows the display proprietary telephone user to display their own jack number and extension number in Station Programming mode Conditions Display example If the jack number is 02 and the extension number is 102
93. 32 extension Connection between the KX TD816 KX TD1232 and a single line telephone Yes CAUSE SOLUTION The T R is connected to the D1 D2 Use the correct cord inner 2 wires are for T R z ie ae D e If a telephone equipped pe eR with an A A1 relay is Die Ire connected to the KX TD816 KX TD1232 set KX TD816 extension the A A1 relay switch of Se the telephone to OFF Connection between the KX TD816 KX TD1232 and a single line telephone that is polarity sensitive CAUSE SOLUTION The T is connected to the R Reverse the connections of the T R Continued on the following page KX TD816 extension KX TD1232 Available for KX TD1232 only Troubleshooting 6 3 6 1 Troubleshooting Connection between the central office and the KX TD816 KX TD12372 Continued from the previous page Can you dial No outonaCOQ Fe line CAUSE SOLUTION CO lines are connected to the T2 T1 Reconnect the CO lines to the T1 R1 or T2 R2 of the T2 el ea oe Tl R2 telephone jack using 2 conductor wiring CO line CO lines are connected to the T2 R1 KX TD816 KX TD1232 T2 RI e Tl R2 CO line KX TD816 KX TD1232 6 1 3 Operation PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION e When using the speaker The HANDSET e When the heads
94. 4 114 System Programming 4 9 Resource Programming 804 External Pager BGM Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to determine which external pagers will receive Background Music BGM BGM External is turned on and off by Operator 1 e External pager number KX TD816 1 KX TD1232 1 through 4 e Disable sends no BGM Enable sends BGM All external pagers Disable 1 Enter 804 Display Ext Pag BGM 2 Press NEXT Display Pager NO gt 3 Enter an external pager number To enter pager number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example Pagerl Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another pager press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired external pager number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e For KX TD816 one external pager can be installed Please skip steps 6 and 7 e The external pager is a user supplied item For KX TD1232 two external pagers can be installed per system External pagers 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available e Program 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment is used to assign an extension as Operator 1 e Program 803 Music Source Use is used to select the music source to be used for BGM Section 3 Features Background Music BGM External System Programming 4 115
95. 5 C D1 8 16 24 8 green black 16 2 D2 or 27 23 green black 46 C D2 or 32 34 grey red 17 2 Pl 49 grey red 47 C P1 9 grey black 18 2 P2 24 grey black 48 C P2 35 white red 19 2 T 50 white red 49 C not use 10 white black 20 2 25 white black 50 C 36 orange red 21 3 D1 4 12 20 C continuous 11 orange black 22 3 D2 or 28 EXAMPLE orange line 37 yellow red 23 3 PI The line of pin no 26 12 yellow black 24 3 P2 va 38 green red 25 3 T re 13 green black 26 3 R red Simo sce eee ES 40 white red 29 3 P1 ee a et edt fet 15 white black 30 3 P2 Available for KX TD1232 only Installation 2 29 2 3 5 Paralleled Telephone Connection for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone Any single line telephone can be connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone as follows Method 1 Using a Modular T Adaptor Panasoni Modular T Adaptor Panasonic KX J66 or USOC RJA2X 2 conductor wiring cord Connect pins T and R 4 conductor wiring cord For DPT Connect pins D1 and D2 only T and R are not necessary For APT Connect pins T R D1 and D2 Digital Proprietary Telephone Single Line Telephone DPT KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7051 or KX T7052 KX T7235 KX T7250 Analog Proprietary Telephone APT KX T7020 KX T7030 KX T7033 KX T7050 KX T7055 KX T7130
96. 6 To program another field repeat steps 4 and 5 7 Press STORE 8 To program another CO line group press SELECT and the desired CO line group number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END Conditions None Feature References None System Programming 4 133 Section 5 List This section lists tone ring tone and default values of system programming Tone Ring Tone 5 1 lt TONE gt Do Not Disturb DND Confirmation Tone 4 Tone Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 2 Confirmation Tone 3 Dial Tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Dial Tone 3 Dial Tone 4 Busy Tone Reorder Tone Ringback Tone 1 Ringback Tone 2 CO CO Call Limit Warning Tone List 5 2 Tone Ring Tone 5 1 SEN e EE SE SEET SE dE SE Et Q oO N N Wi oO n H lt TONE gt Call Waiting Tone 2 lt RING TONE gt Intercom Hold Recall Doorphone Calls Timed Reminder Callback Ringing Camp on Recall Call Waiting Tone 2 intercom Call Waiting Tone 1 CO Hold Alarm CO intercom CO Calls CO Hold Recall Intercom Calls 5 3 List 5 2 Default Values Address Program Default Manager Programming 000 Date and Time Set KX TD816 94 Jan 1 SAT 12 00 am KX TD1232 93 Jan 1 FRI 12 00 am 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set Not Stored 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set Not Stored 003 Extension Number Set e KX TD8
97. 600 ms 80 160 ms Disable Immediate 1 3 6rings No ring 80 160 ms 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0s Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 117 T 3 Features DTMF Signal Waiting Time 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0s after VPS calls Extension Programming References Section 4 System Programming 200 Hold Recall Time 201 Transfer Recall Time 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time 203 Intercept Time 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time 206 CO to CO Call Duration Time 207 First Digit Time 208 Inter Digit Time 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time 211 Dial Start Time 212 Call Duration Count Start Time DISA Delayed Answer Time DISA Prolong Time Outgoing Message Time DTMF Time CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set 412 Pause Time Flash Time Disconnect Time 603 604 DIL IN Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 990 System Additional Information Fields 6 through 8 Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Timed Reminder Description Each telephone can be set to generate an alarm tone at a preset time as a wake up or reminder This feature can be programmed to be active only once or every day In the case of KX TD1232 a voice message can be recorded for this feature Conditions e Be sure that the system clock works e Setting a new time clears the preset time 3 118 Features Available f
98. AR To change the current entry enter the new modification table number 6 Press to enter the next priority CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 to enter other CO line group numbers and modification table numbers 8 Press STORE 9 To program another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed 10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 11 Press END Conditions e Up to three CO line groups and modification plans can be assigned for System Programming 4 73 322 329 4 55 TRS ARS Programming ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 conta each time schedule A CO line group number and a modification table number must be entered together The highest priority CO line group number and modification table number is entered first left to right e Programs 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit and 331 ARS Modify Added Number are used to make up eight Modification Tables Feature References Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS 4 74 System Programming 4 5 TRS ARS Programming 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit Description Determines how the dialed number should be modified before sending to the central office You can delete the digits from the beginning of the dialed number Selection e Modification table number 1 through 8 e Number of digits to be deleted 0 through 9 O no deleting Default All modification tables 0 Programming 1 Enter 33
99. AR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions There is a maximum of 50 leading digit numbers for each plan Each number has a maximum of seven digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character can be used as a wild card character Feature References Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS 4 72 System Programming 4 5 TRS ARS Programming 322 329 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 Description Assigns the CO line group and modification plan to be used for each route plan and time schedule Program 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 Plan 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Selection e Time schedule A B C D e CO line group number 1 through 8 e Modification table number 1 through 8 Default All time schedules Not stored Programming 1 Enter a program address 322 through 329 Display example ARS Route PL 1 2 Press NEXT to program time schedule A To program another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed Display example A G M G M G M A Enter a CO line group number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new number 4 Press to enter the paired modification table number 5 Enter a modification table number To delete the current entry press CLE
100. CO Line Answer From Any Station TAFAS Ringing occurs over the external paging system call can be answered from any station Remote Station Lock Control Allows an operator to lock an extension so that outgoing calls cannot be made System Outline 1 3 1 2 Basic System Construction The KX TD816 Digital Super Hybrid System has a basic capacity of four CO lines and eight extensions and KX TD1232 has eight CO lines and 16 extensions It is capable of supporting Panasonic digital and analog proprietary telephones DSS Consoles and single line devices such as single line telephones facsimiles To expand its capabilities the system can be equipped with optional components or customer supplied peripherals such as external speakers and external music sources e g radios 1 4 System Outline 1 3 Proprietary Telephones The following Panasonic proprietary telephones are available with this system Proprietary Description Telephone KX T7220 Digital speakerphone 24 CO KX T7230 Digital display speakerphone 24 CO KX T7235 Digital large display speakerphone 12 CO KX T7250 Digital monitor 6 CO KX T7130 Display speakerphone 12 CO 12 PF KX T7020 Speakerphone 12 CO 4 PF KX T7030 Display speakerphone 12 CO 4 PF KX T7033 Display speakerphone 12 CO 4 PF KX T7050 Monitor 12 CO 4 PF KX T7055 Monitor 3 CO 3 PF No
101. Call Duration Count Start Time 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout 801 SMDR Format 802 System Data Printout 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters None Operation References Not applicable Station Programming Description Allows the proprietary telephone PT user to customize the extension to their needs The following are the programming items available For the PT KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 KX T7130 KX T7020 KX T7030 KX T7033 KX T7050 Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Flexible Button Assignment Full One Touch Dialing Assignment Intercom Alerting Assignment Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Outgoing Station Programming Data Default Set For digital PT KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 only Handset Headset Selection Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons For display PT KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7130 KX T7030 only Self Extension Number Confirmation For digital large display PT KX T7235 only Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment For Operator 1 extension PT only Remote Station Lock Control 3 110 Features 3 Features S Detailed information and programming instructions are described in the User Manual Station Programming Conditions During Station Programming the PT is considered to be in busy status Programming References Station Programming 0cceccceecceeceeeeeteeeecnteeeeeees User Manual Operator Service Features User Manual Remote S
102. D To remove all the feature numbers except selection numbers 01 through 16 1st through 16th extension blocks 1 Enter 100 2 Press NEXT System Programming 4 29 100 4 3 System Programming Flexible Numbering contd Conditions Feature References 3 Enter 00 Display All Feature CLR 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e There is a maximum of 16 extension blocks and 36 feature numbers for KX TD816 and 37 feature numbers for KX TD1232 Each extension block has one or two digits consisting of 0 through 9 Assign the leading digits for extension numbers of the respective blocks Assignment of extension blocks defines the limits for programs 003 Extension Number Set and 813 Floating Number Assignment Each feature number has one through three digits consisting of 0 through 9 and If X or is included in a feature number dial pulse telephone users cannot access the feature Double entry and incompatible combinations are invalid Valid entry example 30 and 31 210 and 211 Invalid entry example 5 and 5 30 and 301 If you delete a feature number the feature cannot be used by dialing operation You can remove all the feature numbers except selections 01 through 16 To clear an extension block 01 through 16 it is required to change the corresponding numbers assigned in program 003 Extension Number Set and program 813 Floating Number Assignment Section 3
103. DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment conta Conditions Feature References 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END The eXtra Device Port feature must be assigned Disable for DSS ports There is a maximum of four DSS Consoles per system System Connection permits eight DSS Consoles for KX TD1232 Each DSS Console must be assigned to a DSS Console jack and paired with a proprietary telephone jack in the same system For KX TD816 DSS Consoles 1 through 4 must be assigned to a jack number between 02 and 16 For KX TD1232 DSS Consoles 1 through 4 must be assigned to a jack number between 02 and 32 and DSS Consoles 5 through 8 must be assigned to a jack number between 33 and 64 if available DSS Consoles in the out of service system are unassignable Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable The jack number for the Console and that for the paired extension must be entered together Multiple DSS Consoles cannot be assigned to the same DSS Console jack Multiple DSS Consoles can be paired with the same proprietary telephone jack A DSS Console jack cannot be assigned the jack 01 and the jack number of Manager set in program 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment If all incoming CO calls are set to ring at the operator extension telephone in program 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night assigning the DSS Consoles to the operator extension makes the operator s
104. Digital Super Hybrid System Panasonic NSTALLATION ANUAL Please read this manual before connecting the Digital Super Hybrid System Attachment of customer owned equipment is illegal in some areas of Canada Please consult with your Telephone Company MODEL l KX TD816 KX TD816B Bees Bees KX TD1232 KX TD1232B KX TD1232D KX TD1232DB Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model KX TD816 KX TD816B KX TD1232 KX TD1232B KX TD1232D KX TD1232DB Digital Super Hybrid System System Components Model Description Service Unit KX TD816 KX TD816B KX TD1232 KX TD1232B KX TD1232D KX TD1232DB Digital Super Hybrid System Main Unit Telephone KX T7220 Digital Proprietary Telephone KX T7230 Digital Proprietary Telephone with display KX T7235 Digital Proprietary Telephone with large display KX T7250 Digital Proprietary Telephone KX T7130 Proprietary Telephone with display KX T7020 Proprietary Telephone KX T7030 Proprietary Telephone with display KX T7033 Proprietary Telephone with display KX T7050 Proprietary Telephone KX T7055 Proprietary Telephone KX T7051 Single Line Telephone KX T7052 Single Line Telephone Optional KX T7240 Digital DSS Console Equipment KX T7040 DSS Console KX TD160 KX TD170 KX TD170D KX TD180 KX TD180D KX TD191 Doorphone Card 8 Station Line Unit 4 CO Line Unit D
105. ES 3 57 DSS Console KS TIOA0 KSTI0Od0 3 58 Electronic Station Lockout ee eer 3 60 End to End DTMF Signaling Tone Througb 3 61 Exclusive Hold Call Hold Exclusive CO Line Intercom 3 27 28 Executive Busy Override CO Line o 5 05 scsscsncucesaes tdeadacaedangaadecctvasnens 3 61 Executive Busy Override Bxvtensgton 3 62 Extension EE 3 63 External Feature Access waisiccasadi secisussadivussesaaasustaass EES 3 63 EXtra Device Port XDP nrnna ese tases enden dE E 3 64 PLAS EE 3 65 Flexible Button Button Flexible 00 eeceeeceecccceeseseeeeeeees 3 15 Flexible Number tinna ege ege 3 65 PLATES Station EE 3 68 Full One Towel Estgen dE Eege 3 69 Group Call Pickup Call Pickup Group 3 31 Group CO G CO Button Button Group CO GO 3 16 Ha dset Headset Sele COM Meet i 3 69 Handsfree Ans werback occiivaissscsasavascussazactassaveanisravaceasnavente snevennaapeseaes 3 70 Handsfree Operation ssc ssccisuaseeastssjatevsisane vias genetaonstaecsauedcncssoeeaeeetenetees 3 70 Hold Recall EE 3 71 Host PBX ACCESS nn e E E N EEA 3 72 Intercept ROUNE ee 3 72 Intercom Ca UTS EE 3 73 Last Number Redial Redial Last Number 3 99 LED Indication CO Lime 3 74 LED Indication Intercom 3 75 Tamed Call Duara EE 3 76 Line Access Automatc AAA 3 76 Line Access CO Line Group wiisscissisissgeacsascaceesdlaseaeceasacadvashevensaavesaceis 3 77 Line ACCESS Re EE 3 78 Line Access Indtvidual a n ia 3 79 Line
106. G CO button To make a CO call the user can access an idle CO line in the group by simply pressing the dedicated G CO button Conditions e No G CO button is originally provided on a proprietary telephone PT It is programmable on a CO button by either System or Station Programming e It is needed to program the extension for receiving and or originating calls on CO lines e It is possible to assign the same CO line group to more than one G CO buttons on the same PT e It is possible to assign the same line to an S CO button and to a G CO button e Immediate delayed no ringing or no incoming call disable can be selected on an extension CO line basis e The digital PT user can choose a desired ringer frequency for each G CO button by System or Station Programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 401 CO Line Group Assignment 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming ccccccceeceeeeeseeeteeeeenteeeseees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons 3 16 Features 3 Features B Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 3 Features Answering Direct CO Line Line Access Direct CO Line Group Ringing Delayed LED I
107. IAL STORE STORE HOLD END Location of Controls with the Overlay The pictures below show the functions of the buttons of the KX T7235 and KX T7230 while in programming mode C E C4 a PROGRAM Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT co H PROGRAM SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 if i 1 J A A A a a a oo D oo a oa oa oa oe ao qa a oa oo oo oo J C 1 mt J C It J l J Jt J J Jt J SECRET gt PAUSE CLEAR SECRET e gt PAUSE CLEAR BS D OO gem gem E j IC II j J 1 2 3 1 2 3 We Coon ES 4 5 6 E 4 5 6 STORE STORE 7 8 ol B H 8 9 E SELECT SELECT Ka 0 0 i PREV FLASH END NEXT PREV FLASH END NEXT KY KY System Programming 4 5 4 1 1 Using the Proprietary Telephone Viewing the Display The display gives you helpful information such as what you should do now what you have done etc The KX T7230 and the KX T7235 both utilize two information lines for programming The upper line is called the Message Line and the lower one is called the Function Line The Message Line upper s
108. ISA Card KX TD192 System Inter Connection Card two cards with Connection Cable KX TD193 Caller ID Card KX TD196 Remote Card KX T30865 Doorphone KX T30890 Headset Earphone type KX T7090 Headset Headphone type KX A46 Battery Adaptor KX A216 Backup Battery and Adaptor Card The model marked can be installed in KX TD816C 1232C and KX TD816HK 1232HK only System Components Table The KX TD816 and KX TD816B are described as KX TD816 in this Installation Manual hereafter except necessary cases Also the KX TD1232 KX TD1232B KX TD1232D and KX TD1232DB are described as KX TD1232 except necessary cases The models marked can be installed in KX TD1232 only The model marked S can be installed in KX TD816 only System Components NOTES e This Installation Manual does not show complete model numbers that indicate the country where your models should be used The model number of your unit is found on the label affixed to the unit MODEL NO label e The Digital Proprietary Telephone is abbreviated as DPT The Analog Proprietary Telephone is abbreviated as APT e Illustrations of DSHS and proprietary telephones used in this manual may be different from the actual appearance of your DSHS and telephone models e Primary Power and default values of KX TD1232DBX are the same as those of the KX TD1232BX in this manual Similarly KX TD1232DXs are the same as KX TD123
109. JackO2 lt gt EXT102 Programming References Station Programming ccccccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees User Manual Self Extension Number Confirmation Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Display Time and Date Description Offers the display proprietary telephone user a display of either the present time and the date or the date and the day of the week It is displayed while on hook Conditions e There are two types of display Display example 1 Month Day Time Jan 1 12 00AM Display example 2 Month Day Year Day of the Week Jan 1 1993 FRI e The present date and time are set by System Programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 000 Date and Time Set 3 54 Features 3 Features D Feature References None Operation References Appendix User Manual Display Examples Display Contrast Adjustment Description Allows the display proprietary telephone user to adjust the display contrast Conditions The adjusting method depends on the type of proprietary telephones PT For a digital PT Soft buttons and Volume button are used to sharpen the contrast to one of three levels For an analog PT a sliding lever on the telephone CONTRAST selector is used to select from three available levels Programming References Configurations sess Ba AGAR eR RS User Manual Display Contrast Adjustment KX T7230 and KX T7235 only Fe
110. K External Music Input Two conductors Jack MINIJACK 3 5 mm 9 64 inch diameter Extension Connection Cable Single line telephones KX T7051 KX T7052 1 pair wire T R KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 2 pair wire D1 D2 or 2 pair wire T R D1 D2 KX T7020 KX T7030 KX T7033 2 pair wire T R D1 D2 KX T7050 KX T7055 KX T7130 KX T7240 KX T7040 2 pair wire D1 D2 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording E KX TD1232 Interface EIA RS 232C Output Equipment Printer Detail Recording Date Time Extension Number CO Line Number Dialed Number Call Duration Account Code System Capacity Control Method Switching Power Supplies CO lines 12 max Stations 32 max 64 max with eXtra Device Port CPU 16 bit CPU Non Blocking PCM Time Sharing Switch Service Unit Primary Power KX TD1232 D BX HK ML NL NZ__ 220 240 VAC 50 60 Hz KX TD1232C 120 VAC 60 Hz KX TD1232 D X 110 120 VAC 50 60 Hz Secondary Station Supply Volt 30V Circuit Volt 5V 15V Power Failure e Memory backup duration seven years with a factory provided lithium battery e 6 CO lines max automatically System Outline 1 11 15 Specifications Dialing Outward Internal Mode Conversion Connector CO lines assigned to stations Power Failure Transfer e System operation for about three hours using recommended batteries consisting of two 12 VDC car
111. KX T30865 Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 Door Opener 2 Door Opener 1 1 4 8 Backup Battery and Adaptor Card KX A216 Operate all the features as a backup power supply in the event of a power failure Backup Battery and Adaptor Card KX A216 1 8 System Outline Available for KX TD816 only LA Options 1 4 9 Battery Adaptor KX A46 Supports the connection of two car batteries 12 VDCx2 for power backup in case of a power failure Battery Adaptor KX A46 Saran Wea Two car batteries connected in series Battery Adaptor Connector Notes The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit 1 4 10 DSS Console KX T7240 KX T7040 Permits easy and quick access to stations and features The Busy Lamp Field shows the idle or busy state of each station DSS Consoles are designed for use with a proprietary telephone The system supports up to four DSS Consoles per system Paired Telephone DSS Console Proprietary KX T7240 Telephone KX T7040 Pair Notes The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit System Outlin
112. Line Preference Outgoing Line Access Direct System Programming 4 35 105 4 3 System Programming Account Codes Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the account codes for Account Code Entry Verified All Calls and Verified Toll Restriction Override modes If Verified All Calls is assigned in program 508 Account Code Entry Mode an account code is required to make a CO call If Verified Toll Restriction Override is assigned an account code is only required for a toll call and overrides toll restriction e Location number 01 through 20 e Account code 10 digits max All locations Not stored 1 Enter 105 Display Account Code 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter an account code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new account code 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 20 verifiable account codes Each code has a maximum of 10 digits consisting of 0 through 9 e Program 508 Account Code Entry Mode is used to select the Account Code Entry mode e Account codes having 99
113. M e KX TD816 94 Jan 1 SAT 12 00 AM e KX TD1232 93 Jan 1 FRI 12 00 AM 1 Enter 000 Display Day Time Set 2 Press NEXT Display example 93 Jan 1 FRI 3 Enter the year To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new year 4 Press gt 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired month is displayed 6 Press gt 7 Enter the day To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new day 8 Press gt 9 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired day of the week is displayed 4 14 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming Date and Time Set contd 000 Conditions Feature References 10 Press STORE 11 Press NEXT Display example 12 00 AM 12 Enter the hour To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new hour 13 Press gt 14 Enter the minute To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new minutes 15 Press gt 16 Press SELECT for AM or PM 17 Press STORE 18 Press END e After changing an entry you can press STORE You do not have to perform all of the rest of the steps e To go back to the previous field press lt at steps 4 through 9 and steps 13 through 16 e If you hear the alarm after pressing STORE check that the date is valid e The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Display Time and Date System Programming 4 15 001 4 2 Ma
114. NEXT to program ringback tone status To program another status keep pressing NEXT until the desired status is displayed Display example RBT pak 4 44 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 113 VM Status DTMF Set conta 3 Enter a DTMF signal number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 4 Press STORE 5 To program another selection keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired selection is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END Conditions e A DTMF signal number can have a maximum of three digits consisting of 0 through 9 and PAUSE e The DTMF signals are sent to the extensions in the extension group that is assigned as VM or AA in program 106 Station Hunting Type Feature References Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration System Programming 4 45 114 4 3 System Programming VM Command DTMF Set Description Sets the DTMF command signals transmitted to your Voice Processing System VPS There are four commands available Leave Message Get Message Automated Attendant Service Voice Mail Service These commands are used in the following ways A If your VPS is used for Voice Mail VM Service 1 Call Forwarding Intercept Routing to Voice Mail If a call is forwarded to the VPS your system will send a mailbox number to the VM port This allows the caller to leave a message wi
115. O Button Loop CO L CO Button Single CO S CO Button Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Feature References Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Operation References Basic Operation User Manual Making Calls Lockout Description If one party in a conversation goes on hook they are both disconnected from the speech path automatically This feature applies to extension and CO calls Reorder tone is sent to the off hook party before it is disconnected Conditions In the case of a single line telephone SLT if nothing is dialed within a certain period of time after the other party goes on hook reorder tone is sent to the SLT and then it is disconnected from the speech path Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Lockout Features 3 81 M 3 Features Manager Extension Description One extension in the system can be assigned as the system manager This extension can perform System Programming Conditions e Besides the manager extension the extension that is connected to the jack 1 is able to perform System Programming e If eXtra Device Port mode is enabled at the manager extension the proprietary telephone user is regarded as the manager Programming References Section 4 System Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment Feature References None Operation Reference
116. OS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Section 3 Features Do Not Disturb DND Override System Programming 4 99 508 4 7 COS Programming Account Code Entry Mode Description There are three account code modes Option Verified All Calls and Verified Toll Restriction Override This program determines the mode to be used by each Class of Service COS Option mode The user can enter any account code if needed Verified All Calls mode The user must always enter a pre assigned account code to make a CO call Verified Toll Restriction Override mode The user must enter a pre assigned account code when the user needs to override toll restriction Selection e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS e Option Verify All Verified All Calls Verify Toll Verified Toll Restriction Override Default All COS Option Programming 1 Enter 508 Display Call Accounting 2 Press NEXT Disp
117. POWER SUPPLY CORD IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT AND RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG FOR SAFETY REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS THE POWER SOCKET WALL OUTLET SHOULD BE LOCATED NEAR THIS EQUIPMENT AND BE EASILY ACCESSIBLE TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the bottom of the unit You should note the model number and the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft MODEL NO SERIAL NO Introduction This Installation Manual provides technical information for the Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System KX TD816 KX TD1232 It is designed to serve as an overall technical reference for the system and includes a description of the system its hardware and software features and services and environmental requirements This manual contains the following sections Section 1 System Outline Provides general information on the system including system capacity and specifications Section 2 Installation Contains the basic s
118. Preference Incoming No Line Prime Line Ringing Line 3 79 Line Preference Outgoing Idle Line No Line Prime Line 3 80 11 Contents N EOC KOT eeens a aa a a 3 81 Loop CO L CO Button Button Loop CO L CO ee 3 17 Manager EXtension WEEN 3 82 Message E TE 3 82 Microphone EE 3 83 Mixed Station ee 3 83 Module Expansion jsscicssuccsrsisisdecvavnsataasegvecsaaveaieasy docedabeesasnesuveaceesnccasa 3 84 Music op Hold pesca nn ea a E E O REESEN 3 85 Night EE 3 85 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA 3 86 e PTE Et a a Ee ee 3 87 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button 3 88 Operator Seis oases sta re a aces tudaneen bes a aerat tees is 3 88 Operator EE 3 89 Outgoing Message OGM as scisseaciccdsnds suche Je eledensbanseras Mande deu 3 89 PAGING FEATURES SUMMARY AA 3 90 Paging All npese a a a n desdgace i 3 91 Paging Ext rnal sjcsciissucisiascisadeeavaveesssacversaanseaceuscecetenspacavesaesyeceusnceess 3 92 PMOL EE 3 93 Paralleled Telephone e ee Ee 3 93 Pause Insertion Automatic seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesessesesseessessessssssessesesse 3 94 PHC UY Dialing EE 3 95 Power Fail re E EE 3 96 PO wer Pat lane Trans EE 3 96 Privacy EE 3 97 PTV ACY RELEASE eet Ee 3 97 Pulse to Tone Conversion yiivssasisdissicaccassavadsasesoaneanaseeeissesaceasoovaceasnavens 3 98 R dial attente resene anana a ENEE EEN 3 98 Redial Last Number seg dee Ee aere AE teed 3 99 Redial Saved Number 3 100 Remote St
119. Press END Select the standard used by your modem Section 3 Features System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer Available for KX TD1232 only System Programming 4 125 990 4 10 Option Programming System Additional Information Description Adds the following programming items if required Area 1 There are 10 fields available in Area 1 as follows Displ ne 0010100011000001 t4 4 slid 4 Lid Field number 10 9 91 D 6 5 4 unused OI 2 1 Area 2 There are 13 fields available in Area 2 as follows Displ fe en bOO LOO 007 OTTON 4 44 b bbb lide Field number unused 26 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 C1 Area 3 KX TD816 1 through 8 below match CO lines 1 through 8 KX TD1232 1 through 16 below match CO lines 1 through 16 Display example o000000000000000 d AAA EA EA AA ASA EZ LL CO number 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 H l Field number 23 Area 4 KX TD1232 17 through 24 below match CO lines 17 through 24 Displ ane 1111111000000000 UNENEE EE EE CO number 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 l J de de ale y Field number unused 25 24 23 4 126 System Programming CO numbers 9 through 24 in the field number 23 are available for KX TD1232 only 4 10 Option Programming System Additional Information conta 990 Exp
120. Press NEXT Display example Time 000 msec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e You enter a number from 0 through 40 The actual time is a 100 times your input e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Line Access Automatic Line Access CO Line Group Line Access Direct Line Access Individual System Programming 4 61 212 4 4 Timer Programming Call Duration Count Start Time Description Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of dialing and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls When the system has sent out all the digits to the central office and this timer expires the system starts counting the call A display telephone shows the elapsed time of the call The starting time and the duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record Selection Time seconds 0 through 60 Default Os Programming 1 Enter 212 Display SMDR Durat Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 0 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e The timer starts counting after all the digits are dialed This timer is not applied to incoming calls The timer for incoming calls starts immediately e You cannot leave the entry empty Feature References Section 3 Features Display Call Information Station Message Deta
121. Programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming cceccceeccesceeeeeeteeeeenteceeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Single CO S CO Button Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons 3 18 Features 3 Feature References Operation References User Manual Buttons on Proprietary Telephones Features Section 3 Features Answering Direct CO Line LED Indication CO Line Line Access Direct Making Calls DPT Features Basic Operation B Line Access Individual Ringing Delayed Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Outward Dialing Line Access Individual Description Proprietary telephones are provided with the feature line access buttons listed below Proprietary Telephones KX T Buttons 7020 7030 7033 7050 7055 7130 7220 7230 7235 7250 AUTO ANSWER MUTE7 VW Vv Y Vv Y Vv Vv AUTO DIAL STORE f Vv Vv Vv Vv vi Vv Vv Vv Vv Y CO Y 12 C2 v 12 W 12 WB W 12 v 24 v 24 v 12 Y 6 CONE f Vv Y Y Y Y Vv Vv Vv Y FLASH Vv Vv Y Y A Y A Vv Vv Y Function Y 10 FWD DND Vv Vv Vv Vv Y Vv Y HOLD Y Y Y Y vi kv Y V
122. R eee ccecceeesceesteeeetsees input An ON condition of circuit DR DSR indicates the printer is ready Circuit DR DSR ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer Signal Ground SG Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signal Data Terminal Ready ER DTR ce eeereees output This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate that it is ON LINE Circuit ER DTR ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer It is switched OFF when the unit is OFF LINE Data Carrier Detect CD OCH input The ON condition is an indication to data terminal DTE that the catrier signal is being received Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout 801 SMDR Format 802 System Data Printout 806 807 E1A RS 232C Parameters Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer 2 40 Installation 2 3 11 Installation of Lightning Protectors Overview A lightning protector is a device to be installed on a CO line to prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging equipment A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line Troubles due to lightning surges have been showing a steady increase with the development of electronic equipment In many
123. R or Personal Computer for System Programming Battery Adaptor KX A46 Two car batteries connected in series e Consisting of two 12 VDC To AC Outlet 2 12 Installation 2 3 1 System Connection Diagram KX TD816 CO Lightning Protectors to CO s 1 through 4 initial 8 CO Lines d d 16 Extensions 8 extensions initial 8 extensions additional two pair one pair Single Line Telephone one pair KX T7230 two pair one pair KX T7240 two pair KX T7033 KX T7020 It is recommended that extension of jack 1 is a display proprietary telephone two pair Voice Processing System KX T7040 Parallel connection of telephones is possible Refer to Section 2 3 5 Paralleled Telephone Connection needs Optional Cards or Adaptor Installation 2 13 2 3 10 Printer Connection A user supplied printer can be connected to the EIA RS 232C Connector 25 pin on the main unit The printer is used to print out SMDR call records and system programming data Connect the EIA RS 232C connector of the printer to the EIA Connector EIA Connector Seria
124. RG number 1 through 8 x all CO line groups e Time milliseconds Disable no EFA 80 96 112 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 All CO line groups 96 ms KX TD816NL 1232NL All CO line groups 600 ms for the other systems 1 Enter 413 Display TRG Flash Time 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter a CO line group number To enter CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 600msec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e You may disable EFA if not required The Flash feature will be in effect in place of EFA Program 414 Disconnect Time is used to select the time required for the Flash feature e The flash time required is determined by the central office or the host PBX lines e To assign all CO line groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 e Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign each CO line to a CO line group Section 3 Features External Feature Access Flash System Programming 4 89 414 45 CO Line Programming Disconnect Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature Referenc
125. S Consoles KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 2 Using Amphenol Connector for KX TD1232BX C HK ML NL NZ X Connection To connect jacks 1 through 16 insert the connectors to the system as shown For Cable Pin Numbers to Be Connected see page 2 24 Connector type 50 pin Amphenol 57 JE lj series or the equivalent G 25 1 Si EI H 50 26 EL To extensions gt Jacks 9 16 gt To extensions Jacks 1 8 After inserting the connector fasten the connector with the nylon tie Installation 2 23 2 3 3 Extension Connection for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 Cable Pin Numbers to Be Connected CONN CLIP EXTN 9 16 2 2 PIN NO EXTN 1 8 SEXTNG SEXTN SEXTN 26 1 T T T T 1 2 R R R R e i Jack gt A Jack A Jack Sa Jack 7 28 5 No 1 Pl No 9 Pi No 17 P1 No 25 Pi 3 6 P2 P2 P2 bi 29 7 T T T T 4 8 R R R R Ss Jack Se gt Jack E Jack Se J
126. STORE 6 To program another modification table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired modification table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of eight Modification Tables each of which can be given a number to be added e Each number has a maximum of 20 digits consisting of 0 through 9 RB and PAUSE Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS 4 76 System Programming 4 5 CO Line Programming 400 CO Line Connection Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to identify the CO lines which are connected to the system s This prevents users from originating a call to a line which is not connected e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Connect No Connect All CO lines Connect 1 Enter 400 Display CO Connection 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Connect 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO 24 are for the Slave if av
127. System Access DISA Timed Reminder Outgoing Message OGM Available for KX TD1232 only System Programming 4 65 300 4 55 TRS ARS Programming TRS Override for System Speed Dialing Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Allows you to enable toll restriction override for System Speed Dial Numbers If this is enabled all extension users can make System Speed Dialing calls with no restriction Enable Disable Disable 1 Enter 300 Display SPD Override 2 Press NEXT Display example Override Disable 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Select Enable for toll restriction override Select Disable for toll restriction Section 3 Features Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing 4 66 System Programming 45 TRS ARS Programming 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References These allow you to specify the numbers which are toll restricted for each toll restriction level as follows Program 301 restricts levels 2 through 6 Program 302 restricts levels 3 through 6 Program 303 restricts levels 4 through 6 Program 304 restricts levels 5 through 6 Program 305 restricts level 6 kel kel kel kel e Location number 01 through 20 e Toll call number 7 dig
128. T Display example Groupl Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE To program another extension group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired extension group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e Program 602 Extension Group Assignment is used to assign the extension group members e The system supports a maximum of eight jacks 16 jacks during System Connection for KX TD1232 for connection to a Voice Processing System as VM or AA ports Section 3 Features Station Hunting Voice Mail Integration System Programming 4 37 107 4 3 System Programming System Password Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the password required for entering System Programming mode and for maintenance from a personal computer Password 4 through 7 digits 1234 1 Enter 107 Display System Password 2 Press NEXT Display Password 1234 3 Enter a password To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new password 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e The password can be from four to seven digits long The valid numbers are from 0 through 9 e If less than four digits are entered they are not stored e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer System Programming with Proprietary Telephone 4 38 System Pro
129. TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Extension number 2 through 4 digits Disable no DIL 1 1 Default All CO lines Disable Day Night Programming 1 Enter a program address 407 for day or 408 for night Display example DIL 1 1 Asn Day 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number To disable DIL 1 1 press CLEAR Press STORE To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available CO line numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 e You set the extension numbers in program 003 Extension Number Set or floating numbers of pagers DISA messages and the modem in program 813 Floating Number Assignment e If a CO line is also programmed for DIL 1 N in programs 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night it is regarded as a DIL 1 1 line Feature References Section 3 Features Direct In Lines DIL Night Servic
130. TD1232 D BX HK ML NZ D X All CO lines Disable KX TD816C 1232C All CO lines 400 ms 1 Enter 405 Display CPC Detection 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt A Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 400msec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO 24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 e You may disable CPC Signal Detection for a CO line e Program 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set is used to program CPC Signal Detection for outgoing CO calls Section 3 Features Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Direct Inward System Access DISA 4 82 System Programming Available for KX TD1232 only 4 5 CO Line Programming 406 Caller ID Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Enables Caller ID feature for the CO lines to which Caller ID Service is offered by a Central Office by contract CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines
131. Time milliseconds 80 160 All CO lines 80 ms 1 Enter 404 Display DTMF Time 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 80msec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 e The DTMF time required is determined by the CO line or PBX line Section 3 Features Dial Type Selection System Programming 4 81 405 4 5 CO Line Programming CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the expected minimum duration of the CPC Signal on incoming CO calls If this is programmed the system disconnects the line when the CPC Signal is detected e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Time milliseconds Disable no detection 100 200 300 400 500 600 Model Number Default KX TD816BX HK ML NZ KX
132. ack Se 31 1 No 2 Pi No 10 Pi No 18 P1 No 26 Pi 6 12 P2 P2 P2 bi 32 13 T T T T 7 14 R R R R e Jack gt Jack ep Jack SS Jack r 34 17 No 3 Pi No 11 Pi No 19 P1 No 27 Pi 9 18 P2 P2 pi P2 35 19 T T T T 10 20 R R R R a SS Jack Jack e Jack e Jack 37 73 No 4 Pi No 12 PI No 20 P1 No 28 Pi 12 24 P2 P2 P2 bi 38 25 T T T T 13 26 R R R R 7 Jack SE Jack Jack nes Jack 40 29 No 5 Pi No 13 Pi No 21 P1 No 29 Pi 15 30 P2 P2 pi P2 41 31 T T T T 16 32 R R R R Se gt Jack e g Jack E Jack e Jack 43 35 No 6 Pi No 14 PI No 22 P1 No 30 Pi 18 36 pi P2 P2 P2 44 37 T T T T 19 38 R R R R e Jack Jack a Jack Jack es 46 41 No 7 Pi No 15 Pi No 23 P1 No 31 Pi 21 42 P2 P2 bi P2 47 43 T T T T 22 44 R R R R 48 45 DI Di Di Di 23 46 cas D2 ae el SE 4 D ee D2 49 47 o P1 0 P1 o PI Se P1 24 48 P2 P2 P2 P2 Notes 8EXTN in the table indicates an extension expansion area for KX TD816 However pins P1 and P2 are not available because KX TD816 cannot perform OHCA by KX T7130 See Section 3 Features Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA 2 24 Installation 2 3 3 Extension Connection for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 There are two expansion areas on the main unit of KX TD816 one for 8 Station Line Unit and the other for 4 CO Line Unit 8EXTN in the table indicates an extension expansion a
133. aging Jack rr Speaker F Amplifier 5 fe D Paging Equipment KX TD1232 Up to two external pagers user supplied can be connected to KX TD1232 per system as illustrated below Use an RCA connector and shielded cable e Output impedance 600 Q Maximum length of the cable AWG 18 22 Under 10 m 33 feet a E SH RH GEE Paging Jack 2 Paging Jack 1 NW Speaker f Amplifier WW EE Paging Equipment 2 J Speaker 5 TN Amplifier O H oo Paging Equipment 1 2 34 Installation 2 3 8 External Pager Paging Equipment Connection Notes e System Connection permits a maximum of four external pagers It is programmable which external pager will send background music and whether all the pagers will generate confirmation tone e To adjust the sound level of the pagers use the volume control on the amplifiers Programming References Section 4 System Programming 804 External Pager BGM 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone Feature References Section 3 Features Background Music BGM External Paging External Paging All Tru
134. ailable e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment System Programming 4 77 401 4 5 CO Line Programming CO Line Group Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Each CO line must be assigned to a CO line group This program defines the CO line group assignment for each CO line For example if there are multiple telephone service companies available the CO lines can be grouped by company e CO line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 CO01 TRG 1 CO05 TRG 5 COU Roi CO06 TRG 6 C003 TRG 3 C007 TRG 7 CO04 TRG 4 CO08 TRG 8 for KX TD816 CO08 through CO24 TRG 8 for KX TD1232 1 Enter 401 Display Trunk Group Asn 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt A Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 TRG1 4 Enter the CO line group number To change the current entry enter the new CO line group number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master
135. al Saved Number Remote Station Lock Control Description Operator is given the privilege of controlling Electronic Station Lockout on any station Conditions Remote Station Lock Control is superior to Electronic Station Lockout If Station Lockout has already been set by the extension user and Remote Station Lock is set by Operator 1 cancelling the lock is only possible by Operator 1 Programming References No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Electronic Station Lockout Operation References Operator Service Features User Manual Remote Station Lock Control 3 100 Features 3 Features R Reverse Circuit Description This feature can be used to detect a reversal of CO line polarity from Central Office when trying to make a CO line call This is useful for determining the start and completion of CO line calls Programming Reference Ringing Delayed Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 416 Reverse Circuit Assignment If Direct In Lines DIL 1 N is established a telephone set is originally set to ring instantly This setting can be changed to delayed ringing no ringing or no incoming call disable on a CO line number basis e This feature does not apply to DISA or DIL 1 1 calls e If delayed no ringing or no incoming call disable is assigned to an extension the extension can answer an incoming call during no ring or the delay time by pressing the
136. al Call Log Extension Dialing Description Provides a display of extension names and numbers The user can call an extension by pressing the associated function button Conditions System Programming of extension numbers and names is required Programming References Section 4 System Programming 003 Extension Number Set 004 Extension Name Set 100 Flexible Numbering 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks Feature References None 3 104 Features 3 Features S Operation References User Manual Special Display Features for KX T7235 Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing Description Conditions A list of the names and telephone numbers stored for One Touch Dialing is displayed allowing the user to make a one touch call by name without having to know the number e It is necessary to program One Touch Dialing Numbers and Names into the 10 function buttons F1 through F10 e It is programmable to select the first display number or name Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 990 System Additional Information Field 19 Station Programming cceecceeccesceereeeteeeeenteeneeees User Manual Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment KX T7235 only Section 3 Features One Touch Dialing Special Display Features for KX T7235 Station Speed Dialing System Feature Access Menu Description Co
137. aled number 9 1 234 567 8910 is modified to 9 10333 1 234 567 8910 to access the least expensive Carrier E Similarly if Modification Table 2 is applied it is modified to 9 10555 1 234 567 8910 to access Carrier F Enter the Removed Digit program when it is necessary to delete some leading digits from the user dialed number For example if the user manually dials a Carrier Access Code but the carrier is not the least expensive modification is required For example to delete 10333 from the beginning of the user dialed number and to add 10555 enter 5 in Removed Digit program Enter 10555 in Added Number program When 9 10333 1 234 567 8910 is dialed 9 10333 1 234 567 8910 Five digits are deleted and 10555 is added here 10555 1 234 567 8910 is sent to the CO line Section 3 Features Line Access Automatic DPT Features SLT Features Outward Dialing Line Access Automatic Features 3 9 A Flow Chart of ARS procedures 3 Features A long distance call is made Restricted Toll Restriction Check we Call is not made Not Restricted Is ARS Access Code Default 9 0 dialed Yes No Leading Digit Table Are the leading digits found in a Call is routed via selected line Yes No y i Obtains applicable Route Plan Table n
138. all with two screws 2 Attach the Doorphone Card Cabinet to the main unit and press it down Note Two kinds of screws are included 3 Connect the cord to the Doorphone Card Please choose an appropriate one Connector depending on your wall type KX TD1232 KX TD816 Lem Type 1 When the doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall pi Type 2 When you wish to install the doorphone directly to the wall 3 Connect the wires from the terminal box to the screws located in the front cover il wl i wil i Ea il KP gt II url col To the terminal box See the following page q 4 4 Secure both halves together and re install the screw To Terminal Box Installation 2 65 2 66 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Wiring of the Doorphone KX TD816 KX TD1232 is required Doorphone 1 4 conductor wiring gt 1 Connect the Doorphone Card to
139. aller ID Service on a CO line basis Section 3 Features Caller ID 4 42 System Programming Available for KX TD816C 1232C and KX TD816HK 1232HK only 4 3 System Programming IlI Caller ID Name Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References With Caller ID Service the calling party is displayed either by its ID Code or by its name If the name display is required use this program to give a name to a caller ID Code stored in program 110 Caller ID Code Set e Location number 001 through 500 e Caller ID Name 15 characters max All locations Not stored 1 Enter 111 Display Caller ID Name 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 Not Stored 4 Enter a Caller ID Name For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 500 Caller ID Names which corresponds to a maximum of 500 Caller ID Codes stored in program 110 Caller ID Code Set e Each name has a maximum of 15 characters Section 3 Features Caller ID Availabl
140. and the new parameter 6 Press STORE 7 e To program another CO button of the same jack repeat steps 4 through 6 e To program another jack press SELECT and repeat steps 3 through 6 8 Press END 1 Perform the same procedures as steps 1 through 4 above 2 Enter 2 3 Press STORE 4 Press END e A centralized telephone is a telephone connected to jack 01 or a jack programmed as a manager extension in program 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment e There is a maximum of 16 proprietary telephones for KX TD816 and 64 proprietary telephones for KX TD1232 e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e The number of the CO buttons available depends on the telephone type Refer to Section 3 Buttons on Proprietary Telephones To program 24 CO buttons use the proprietary telephone KX T7230 If you press the same CO button again at step 5 you can select a desired ringer frequency for the CO button from eight types of ring tone When you enter the tone type number 1 through 8 you will hear the selected tone type until STORE is pressed This selection is possible only for the CO buttons that have been assigned to Single CO Group CO or Loop CO Section 3 Features Button Flexible Buttons on Proprietary Telephones 4 24 System Programming 4 2 Ma
141. are applied to the following 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 2 Account Code Entry 3 Dial Access Automatic 4 Line Access CO Line Group 5 Line Access Individual 6 Special Carrier Code Entry 7 System Speed Dialing e The Emergency numbers as Police or Fire Department should be stored in Program 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Level 6 Ifa stored Host PBX access code or a stored carrier code is found in the dialed number a toll restriction check starts for succeeding telephone number e Toll restriction for System Speed Dialing can be cancelled for the whole system e It is programmable whether the X or the user dials is to be checked or not on the Toll Restriction code This is useful to prevent unauthorized calls which could be possible through certain Central Offices exchange system e It is programmable to admit the press of the FLASH button during a CO call on the extensions in Levels 7 and 8 Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 207 First Digit Time 208 Inter Digit Time 300 TRS Override for System Speed Dialing 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 311 Special Carrier Access Codes 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night 601 Class of Service 990 System Additional Information Fields 14 15 Section 3 Features Toll Restriction for Special
142. ark the four screw positions 2 Drill four holes and drive the anchor plugs included with a hammer flush to the wall To the wall surface Concrete Wall Anchor Plug 1 4 inch 29 mm 1 1 8 inch 3 Install the four screws included into the anchor plugs Drive the screw to this position 4 Hook the main unit on the screw heads Installation 2 9 2 2 Installation of the Main Unit 2 2 4 Frame Ground Connection IMPORTANT Connect the frame of the main unit to ground To ground To ground 2 10 Installation 22 Installation of the Main Unit 2 2 5 Opening Front Cover 1 Loosen two screws on the right side of the main unit 2 Open the front cover in the direction of arrow A screw screw Note Two screws are attached to the front cover with springs so that they will not be lost Installation 2 11 2 3 Connection 2 3 1 System Connection Diagram KX TD816 External Music Source Amplifier Speaker Printer for SMD
143. atically selects the least expensive route available at the time an outgoing CO call is made Previous programming eliminates the necessity for the user to dial the access code of the least expensive carrier All the user has to do is to dial the feature number for ARS and the number The appropriate CO line group is selected and an appropriate access code is added before the number is outpulsed Conditions e Toll Restriction check is done before ARS is applied e ARS works according to the selected dialing plan Thus if the user dialed number is not found in the dialing plan Leading Digit Tables the dialed number is sent out with Local Access Automatic line access Code e ARS is not applied to a call made by specifying a CO line group In other words it is possible to make a CO call by assigning a CO line group directly ARS Override e This feature also applies to Call Forwarding to CO Line Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Automatic line access ARS 312 ARS Mode 313 ARS Time 314 321 ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 322 329 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit 331 ARS Modify Added Number Programming Example The following is an example to show how to program ARS so that the user can call the XYZ Company via the least expensive line Step 1 Program ARS to work when the feature number for ARS is dialed by the user Use the prog
144. ating a specific CO line since a CO line is automatically selected from the designated CO line group All CO lines belonging to a CO line group follow the assignment determined for that CO line group A list of assignments for each CO line group is shown as follows The destination of Intercept Routing e Disconnect Time e Flash Time e Host PBX Access Code e Pause Time used in Speed Dialing and Flash e Each CO line can only belong to one CO line group e CO lines in a CO line group are selected uniformly if all lines belong to the same system e If System Connection is employed a CO line group can include CO lines in both systems In this case a CO line is first selected from the user s system If all lines in the user s system are in use a line in the other system is selected Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 401 CO Line Group Assignment 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night 411 Host PBX Access Codes 412 Pause Time 413 Flash Time 414 Disconnect Time None Operation References Not applicable 3 40 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features C Conference Description Conditions The system supports three party conference calls including outside or inside parties During a two party conversation the extension user can add a third party to their conversation thereby establishing a conference Possible conference com
145. ating station keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired floating station is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END Conditions e In the case of KX TD816 skip steps 5 and 6 e A floating number is composed of two through four numerical digits 0 through 9 e The leading one or two digits of the floating numbers are subject to program 100 Flexible Numbering 01 through 16 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks Available for KX TD1232 only System Programming 4 123 813 4 9 Resource Programming Floating Number Assignment contd e Floating numbers and extension numbers should be unique Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 e You cannot leave the entry empty Feature References Section 3 Features Floating Station 4 124 System Programming 4 9 Resource Programming 814 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Modem Standard Assigns the modem standard There are two standards available BELL and CCITT BELL CCITT Model Number Default KX TD1232 D B X HK ML NL NZ D X CCITT KX TD1232C BELL 1 Enter 814 Display MOD 2 Press NEXT EM Standard Display example MODEM BELL 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5
146. ation Lock Control sae cicees gees 3 100 Kee EE EE 3 101 Ringing Deler secheren aen eege eege Ee eege 3 101 Ringing Discriminating vies nee ig rege 3 102 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons 3 102 Saved Number Redial Redial Saved Number 3 100 Screened Call Transfer to CO Line Call Transfer Screened to CO Line e ee eeeeeeeeeees 3 33 Screened Call Transfer to Extension Call Transfer Screened to Extension 3 34 DC CTC Eet eege 3 103 12 Available for KX TD1232 only Available for KX TD816BX and KX TD1232DBX DxX only Contents Single CO S CO Button Button Single CO GO 3 18 special Features for K X 17 235 EE 3 104 Cal RE 3 104 Extension Dialing a E R E iS 3 104 Station Speed Dialin pois ee ne e anase aiden Ze omit E eN NT 3 105 System Feature Access Men 3 105 system Speed Dialing ieee ie ii as tones EEEE E EEE E S 3 106 Station Feature EE 3 106 Station HUNN SS ane Dee r E E See 3 107 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR sessesreesrerrerrrerrer 3 108 Station Programming e ssssesesssesesseeesstessresserssetessseessressersseeesseeessees 3 110 Station Programming Data Default Bet 3 111 Station Speed Dialing sy sc8 ssassavssovenctansndcasstosenedenvecaceasdvecwenteoccasesapanedeas 3 112 RE CONNEC CIION EE 3 112 System Data Default Eeer 3 113 System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer 3 114 System Programming with Proprietary Tele
147. ature References None Operation References Not applicable Do Not Disturb DND Description Allows an extension user to appear busy to incoming CO or extension calls This can be set or cancelled by the extension user Conditions If your proprietary telephone PT is not supplied with the FWD DND button it can be assigned on a flexible button e DND does not work for the following calls doorphone calls recalls for hold Timed Reminder alarm or calls directed by Intercept Routing e Setting DND cancels any Call Forwarding feature currently set e A PT user in DND mode can answer a call by pressing the button showing the arrival of the call e An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in their Class of Service Do Not Disturb Override Features 3 55 D 3 Features Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel Station Programming ccccccccesececeeeeceeeceeeeeneeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button Feature References Section 3 Features Do Not Disturb DND Override Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Do Not Disturb DND Do Not Disturb DND Override Description Permits the pre assigned extension user to call another user who sets the Do Not Disturb feature Dialing 1 enabl
148. atures 3 127 T 3 Features Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing Description Allows you to cancel Toll Restriction on System Speed Dialing Normally calls originated by System Speed Dialing are restricted depending on the extension s toll restriction level Once this function is enabled it permits all extension users to make System Speed Dialing calls with no restriction Conditions None Programming References Section 4 System Programming 300 TRS Override for System Speed Dialing Feature References Section 3 Features System Speed Dialing Toll Restriction Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Toll Restriction Override Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing Trunk CO Line Answer From Any Station TAFAS Description A tone signal is sent from the external pager when an incoming CO call is received Any extension user can answer the call Conditions e Connect a user supplied external paging device e One external pager can be installed in KX TD816 Two external pagers can be installed in KX TD1232 per system and System Connection permits four pagers maximum These pagers are numbered from 1 through 4 To answer an incoming call dial the feature number and 1 to 4 The feature number is the same as that used to answer Paging External e A floating number of a pager is programmable es TAFAS can be used in the following cases a The floating number of an ext
149. batteries Dial Pulse DP 10 pps 20 pps Tone DTMF Dialing Dial Pulse DP 10 pps 20 pps Tone DTMF Dialing DP DTMF DTMF DP Service Unit Connector KX TD1232DBX DX 4 pin Connector Stations KX TD1232BX C HK ML NL NZ X for KX TD1232C Service Unit Connector KX TD1232DBX DX 6 pin Connector KX TD1232B X C HK ML NL NZ X Paging Output External Music Input Extension Connection Cable Pin Jack RCA JACK Two conductors Jack MINIJACK 3 5 mm 9 64 inch diameter Single line telephones KX T7051 KX T7052 1 pair wire T R KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 2 pair wire D1 D2 or 2 pair wire T R D1 D2 KX T7020 KX T7030 KX T7033 2 pair wire T R D1 D2 KX T7050 KX T7055 KX T7130 KX T7240 KX T7040 2 pair wire D1 D2 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Interface Output Equipment Detail Recording EIA RS 232C Printer Date Time Extension Number CO Line Number Dialed Number Call Duration Account Code 1 12 System Outline Modular Jack CA 14A Amphenol Connector 3 pair wire T R D1 D2 P1 P2 15 Specifications 1 5 2 Characteristics E KX TD816 Station Loop Limit KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 KX T7020 KX T7030 KX T7033 KX T7050 KX T7055 KX T7130 40 ohms Single Line Telephone KX T705 1 KX T7052 TER 600 ohms including set Keen e 20 ohms Minimum Leakag
150. between the codes as aaaHbbb If nothing is stored it will operate as H s If X F is stored for GETMSG a mailbox number programmed in program 609 Voice Mail Access Codes or an extension number will be sent to the port succeeding the Feature References Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration System Programming 4 47 HS 4 3 System Programming Adjust Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to adjust the time for checking normality of system data Every day at the programmed time the data adjustment is performed e Hour 1 through 12 e Minute 00 through 59 s AM PM 1 00 AM 1 Enter 115 Display Adjust Time 2 Press NEXT to program hour Display example 1 00 AM 3 Enter the hour To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new hour 4 Press to program minute 5 Enter the Minute To change the current entry enter the new minute 6 Press to program AM PM 7 Press SELECT for AM or PM 8 Press STORE 9 Press END You cannot leave the entry empty None 4 48 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 116 ROM Version Display Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Confirms the version of the ROM of the system Display example PO11A30101A Version Date System Number KX TD816 0 KX TD1232 0 Master
151. binations are 1 inside and 2 outside 2 inside and 1l outside and 3 inside e Up to six conference calls are allowed simultaneously e A three party call is also established by Executive Busy Override or Privacy Release e When a two party call is changed to a three party call and vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties Eliminating the tone is programmable e The third party must have a CO button which is common to the CO line in use by the original parties Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 990 System Additional Information Field 13 Station Drosramming seese eeesseessres seerste User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Conference CONF Button Section 3 Features Conference Unattended DPT Features SLT Features Conference Conference Unattended Description Conditions When a proprietary telephone user is in a conference with two outside parties the user can leave the conference to allow the other two parties to continue conversation This is called an Unattended Conference The user may return to the conference if desired e An Unattended Conference can be established when the extension is allowed to transfer a call to a CO line e The duration of an unattended conference is restricted by a system timer Hold Recall results to the extension user who left the conference
152. ble Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel Message waiting set cancel callback 113 VM Status DTMF Set 114 VM Command DTMF Set 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 609 Voice Mail Access Codes 990 System Additional Information Fields 6 through 9 18 Station Programming cccccceeceseereeeneeeeenteeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment MESSAGE Button Voice Mail VM Transfer Button Section 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type Select Voice Mail Hunting 990 System Additional Information Field 10 Section 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type Select Automated Attendant Hunting 990 System Additional Information Field 24 Section 3 Features Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Busy Intercept Routing Call Forwarding Busy No Station Hunting Answer DPT Features SLT Features Voice Mail Integration Operator Service Features Voice Mail Transfer 3 134 Features 3 Features V Volume Control Speaker Handset Receiver Headset Ringer Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to turn up or down the following volumes as desired Handset receiver volume Headset volume Ringer volume Speaker volume Conditions The control method depends on
153. cansancssssvanessncvoss 2 4 6 Remote Card Installaon icopicscaseaeseascrsacduaseseatsaneereteaanes 2 4 7 Caller ID Card Installation 0 0 0 eeeeeescceeseeceesseeeeneeeeeneeees 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Copnnecton 24 9 System CORN CUO i ereechen 2 4 10 Backup Battery and Adaptor Card Connecton eee 2 4 11 Battery Adapter Connection ixcsececestaca seseddeecestedaceesheeaeeseaness Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer s0000 Starting the System for the First Time cccssccsssssssssccsssesees System Restart rccssilcscasccscnerseasestora hanes eee System Data WT Features Absent Message Capability E Account Code Entry ccsssccexsantcavsncadnsatiannesudadetdeaspepsanitesussaateansdvatensssaess Alternate Calling Ring VoiCe eeseseeeseesseerersrrsrirrrrsersrrrrresressre Answornne Direct RER Automatic Callback Busy Camp On t Automatic Redial gt Redial Automatne Automatic Route Selection AR HEEN ee Background Music CE MY eegene Eege Background Music BGM External seeren Busy L mp Fields senecaene sideaine A EEEE Busy Station Signaling BSS ecn iuesceepecadeededeecytiedinatcccecsiecsciepeendoteendh Button Direct Station Selection DSS ciscsccsscrccnssceseieeinccumasdaeeidas Button Flekiblenrsiissirsceisrinsrseieinarosiu nasia ias B tton Group CO GCO ee Button Loop CO L CO ssessssssssseessssssessssrrsseressressersseressrersseessresse Button Single CO S CO sesss
154. cept Routing No Answer features the mailbox number is sent to the VPS automatically with DTMF signaling Follow On ID Up to eight extension jacks can be connected to VPS as extensions in the system System Explanation 1 Voice Mail Service 1 1 Call Forwarding to VM If an extension user sets Call Forwarding C FWD whose destination is the VPS an incoming call is forwarded to the VPS under the proper conditions The system sends to the VPS a mailbox number of the corresponding extension at that time Therefore the calling party can leave his her message in the mailbox of the desired extension without knowing the mailbox number Features 3 129 yV Intercom Call CO Call DIL 1 1 DISA System CO Call DIL 1 1 DISA Extension gt System Operator yj Transfer Extension 3 Features C FWD VM Hunting Chain lt N Z 42 lt LA C FWD VM 1 VM X H Se VM Hunting Chain 1 2 Intercept Routing to VM If a CO line is set as Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA whose destination is the VPS a CO call is forwarded to the VPS under the proper conditions The system sends to the VPS a mailbox number of the corresponding extension at that time Therefore the calling party can leave his her message in t
155. countries there are regulations requiring the installation of a lightning protector A lightning strike to a telephone cable which is 10 m 33 feet above ground can be as high as 200 000 volts This system should be installed with lightning protectors In addition grounding connection to earth ground is very important for the protection of the system Recommended lightning protectors Main Unit Lightning Protector KX TD816C TELESPIKE BLOK MODEL TSB TRIPPE MFG KX TD1232C CO e SPIKE BLOK MODEL SK6 0 TRIPPE MFG CO e Super MAX PANAMAX e MP1 1TW LINX Other Models Panasonic KX A207 Installation CO CO CO Lightning Protectors nal a Main Unit Board EXTN EXTN EXTN Ground Connector enn Frame SLT ii PT Ground Ground Installation 2 41 2 3 11 Installation of Lightning Protectors Outside Installation Main Building Protectors CO Another Building Ter CO Main EXTN PT minal Phas tee g Unit 3 Board EXTN Lightning EXTN peasy La 4 Ground Notice Note If you install an extension outside of the main building the following precautions are recommended 1 Install the extension wire underground 2 Use a conduit to protect the wire The lightning protector for an extension
156. d to program Call Forwarding set Do Not Disturb HOLD Used to place a call on hold INTERCOM Used to make or receive intercom calls MESSAGE Used to send a message or display current message MONITOR Used for handsfree operation PAUSE Inserts a pause in a speed dial number With an analog proprietary telephone it is used as the PROGRAM button PF Programmable Feature This flexible button can be programmed to be a One Touch Dialing FWD DND SAVE Account CONF Conference or Voice Mail Transfer button as desired PROGRAM Used to enter exit Programming mode REDIAL Used for Last Number or Automatic Redial SAVE Used to store a dialed telephone number for Saved Number Redial SHIFT Used to access the second level of Soft button function Soft Pressing a Soft button performs the function operation appearing on the bottom line of the display SP PHONE Speakerphone Used for handsfree operation Pressing the button causes the telephone to switch between handset and handsfree operation TRANSFER Transfers a call to another extension or external destination VOLUME Used to adjust the ringer speaker handset and headset volume and the display contrast 3 20 Features 3 Features C Conditions e Certain buttons are equipped with light indicators LED s to show line or feature status e CO buttons can be classified according to the following three types Single CO S CO button Group CO G CO button
157. ded on DSS Console only e Programmable Feature PF buttons The table below shows all of the features which can be assigned to Flexible Buttons Button Features to be assigned Voice Mail Transfer PF PT DSS S In the table w indicates that the feature can be assigned to the button e A CO line can only appear on one Single CO button of any given telephone A station can only appear on one DSS button of any given telephone or DSS Console e It is possible to have multiple appearances of the same Group CO or Loop CO buttons on the same telephone Incoming and outgoing calls on the line are shown on the button in the following priority Single CO gt Group CO gt Loop CO Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming 0 cceccceeceseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeees Flexible Button Assignment User Manual Features 3 15 B 3 Features Feature References Section 3 Features Buttons on Proprietary Telephones DSS Console KX T7240 KX T7040 Operation References Not applicable Button Group CO G CO Description To support efficient utilization of CO lines a group of CO lines CO line group can be assigned to a CO button The function is referred to as Group CO G CO The G CO button works in conjunction with the DIL 1 N feature Any incoming call from any CO line in the CO line group arrives at the
158. del numbers of the main units and expansion units to be used are shown below e 4 CO Line Unit Main Unit Expansion Unit KX TD1232DBX DX KX TD180D 4 pin Connector KX TD1232BX C HK ML NL NZ X KX TD180 Modular Connector e 8 Station Line Unit Main Unit Expansion Unit KX TD1232DBX DX KX TD170D 6 pin Connector KX TD1232BX C HK ML NL NZ X KX TD170 Amphenol Connector The following steps 1 through 5 and 7 through 10 are common to both expansion cards The step 6 shows four different methods to install respective expansion units 1 Loosen two screws on the cover plate 2 Connect the cabinet cord to the Insert fingers into the slits to remove the connector in the main unit firmly cover plate D1232 Slit S SC a Note There are three cover plates Any of them can be removed as needed Installation 2 55 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180
159. desired day you may keep pressing NEXT at step 3 To assign every day of the week to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Sunday e If day night switching is unwanted select Disable at step 4 e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Night Service 4 34 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 103 Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the sequence in which CO line groups will be accessed when in Automatic Line Access mode When a user dials the feature number for automatic line access default 9 0 or presses the L CO button an idle line is hunted in the programmed CO line group order CO line group number 1 through 8 eight entries max in desired order 12345678 1 Enter 103 Display Local Access 2 Press NEXT Display example Access 12345678 3 Enter the CO line group numbers in priority from top to bottom To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new order 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e There is a maximum of eight CO line groups Up to eight CO line group numbers can be entered e Automatic Line Access feature works only if Automatic Route Selection mode is turned off in program 312 ARS Mode Section 3 Features Line Access Automatic
160. ding No Answer Intercept Routing No Answer In these functions the caller to the extension need not know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS Follow On ID function Ifa DIL 1 N call is transferred to the VPS by IRNA your system transmits the mailbox number of the lowest jack number of the receiving extensions A mailbox number is a respective extension number by default The mailbox number can be changed only if program 990 System Additional Information Field 18 is set to free Pressing the Voice Mail Transfer button and dialing the extension number allows the extension user to transfer to the corresponding mailbox In this case Follow On ID function is available The Voice Mail extension should be set to Data Line Security to achieve proper recording The KX TD816 has one Extension Card and can have one 8 Station Line Unit The KX TD1232 has two Extension Cards and can have two 8 Station Line Units It is recommended that you do not connect more than two VM ports to each card or unit Section 2 Installation 2 3 3 Extension Connection 2 4 3 8 Station Line Unit Connection Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 133 V 3 Features Programming References Common For VM Service For AA Service Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexi
161. disturb set cancel 710 43 Call pickup deny set cancel 720 44 Data line security set cancel 730 45 Call waiting set cancel Zert GG For KX TD1232X 46 Executive busy override deny set cancel 133 and KX TD816NL 1232NL 47 Pickup dialing program set cancel 74 dee 48 Absent message set cancel 750 49 Timed reminder set cancel confirm 76 interchanged f 77 Operator Call 9 50 Electronic station lockout set cancel a amp Anionic line 51 Night service mode set cancel access ARS 0 52 Parallel telephone mode set cancel 39 53 Background music external on off 35 Default feature numbers are shown above In addition to the flexible feature numbers above fixed feature numbers are provided 3 66 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features Fixed Feature Numbers Conditions Feature Default While busy tone is heard Busy Station Signaling BSS 1 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA 1 Executive Busy Override 2 Automatic Callback Busy 6 While Do Not Disturb tone is heard Do Not Disturb Override 1 While calling or talking Conference 3 Door Open 5 Alternate Calling Ring Voice x Pulse to Tone Conversion x Account Code Delimiter 99 When the set is on hook Background music on off 1 Time display date display switching x Day night mode display D e Flexible feature numbers can only be dialed during dial tone e The following are examples of featu
162. does not operate properly 1 Set the System Clear Switch to the CLEAR position 2 Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool 3 Return the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL position while the Power Indicator is flashing approxi mately within 10 seconds C If the system still does not work switch the power off and on again after five minutes D If the system still does not work 1 Switch the power off Set the System Clear Switch to the CLEAR position Switch the power on Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool Set the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL position while the Power Indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds na amp Lu bv E If the system still does not work switch the power off If car batteries are connected to the system disconnect them too Then consult an authorized service person When the power supply stops certain extensions are automati cally connected straight to specific CO lines e KX TD816 Extension T R of jack number TJ CO 1 Extension T R of jack number 2 0 0 CO 2 Extension T R of jack number H CO5 Extension T R of jack number 10 0 0 CO 6 6 6 Troubleshooting 6 1 Troubleshooting e KX TD1232 Extension T R of jack number TJ CO 1 Extension T R of jack number 2 00 eee CO 2 Extension T R of jack number 9 0 eee CO 3 Extension T R of jack number 10 0 CO 4 Extension T R of jack numbe
163. e Direct Inward System Access DISA 4 84 System Programming Available for KX TD1232 only 4 5 CO Line Programming 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Intercept Routing provides an automatic re direction of calls which cannot or have not been answered These programs set the destination in both day and night modes for each line group e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 x all CO line groups e Extension number 2 through 4 digits Disable no Intercept Routing All CO line groups Disable Day Night 1 Enter a program address 409 for day or 410 for night Display example TRG Intercpt Day 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter the CO line group number To enter CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Disable 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number To disable Intercept Routing press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e You set the extension numbers in program 003 Extension Number Set or floating numbers of pagers DISA messages in program 813 Floating Number Assignment You cannot assign the floating number of the modem e To assign all CO line
164. e To meet the user s various needs DSS buttons can be changed to the other function buttons PF Programmable Feature buttons printed as F1 through F16 These buttons are provided with no default setting The paired telephone user can program the buttons for the other function buttons Features 3 59 E 3 Features Conditions e Programming the DSS and PF buttons can be done only from the paired telephone using Station Programming or Programming with Personal Computer System Programming with Proprietary Telephone is not available e If the extension number assigned to a DSS button is changed to another number the DSS button automatically follows the new number Re programming is not necessary e During System Connection DSS Consoles must be paired with telephones in the same system Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 3 Extension Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment Station Programming cccccccecceeeeeeeeteeeeceteeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Feature References Section 3 Features Button Flexible One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Operation References DSS Console Features User Manual Electronic Station Lockout Description Allows the extension users to lock their stations so that other users cannot make outgoing CO calls Any 3 digit numeric code can be used to lock the station T
165. e Fuse KX TD1232 ayy f TE 12VDC each as shown Blue Ko 12 VDC Holder Ground Terminal 2 Insert the plug of the battery adaptor into the battery adaptor connector on the main unit Ground Wire 1 pr Se Connect the ground wire to the ground terminal on the main unit LED Power Switch Ground Wire 3 Turn on the power switch of the battery adaptor LED Power Switch 2 72 Installation 2 4 11 Battery Adaptor Connection Wall Mounting Metal Plates Screws Mounting on Concrete or Mortar Walls Drive the accessory four small screws on the bottom of the unit Place the metal plates so that the screw heads insert into the slots as shown Slide the metal plates in the directions of the arrows and drive the screws Place the templet on the wall to mark two screw positions and install the big screws into the wall Hook the battery adaptor on the screw heads At step 4 drill two holes and drive the anchor plugs with a hammer flush to the wall and install the big screws into the anchor plugs Notes If the Power LED does not go on check the main unit battery adaptor batteries and wiring connection e After connection of the battery adaptor keep the power switch on unless when the main unit is turned off Batteri
166. e a pre recorded message will greet the caller Two different DISA messages may be recorded by Operator 1 Thus one message may be used in day mode and the other in night or they can be used for different CO lines The following items are required for the DISA feature 1 An optional DISA Card must be installed 2 The Floating Station number of the DISA message should be assigned as the DIL 1 1 destination This assigns the DISA line and the message accessed by external callers 3 The DISA message s should be recorded by Operator 1 Only one DISA card can be installed per system During System Connection the DISA card is effective only for the CO line used in the same system A DISA call is answered after ringback tone is returned to the caller after the DISA Delayed Answer Time expires The caller can dial during the message The DISA line can be used to originate CO calls if the security code if required has been dialed The floating number of a DISA message may be selected as the destination of Intercept Routing This system can store up to four programmable DISA user codes Each code should be unique It is possible to assign a Class of Service number to each code In CO Line Security system the caller must enter one of the stored codes after accessing a CO line The Class of Service of the code defines Toll Restriction The duration of CO to CO calls can be limited When the specified time expires both lines are discon
167. e parties 15 seconds before the time out The call is disconnected at the time out unless the extension restores the conference e Transferring a call to an external party cannot be performed from a single line telephone e If the KX TD1232NL is used only extension call can be transferred to CO line Programming References Feature References Operation Reference User Manual Section 4 System Programming 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time 206 CO to CO Call Duration Time 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 503 Call Transfer to CO Line 990 System Additional Information Field 1 Lal kel kel kel Section 3 Features Hold Recall DPT Features Call Transfer to CO Line Features 3 33 C 3 Features Call Transfer Screened to Extension Description Conditions Allows the extension user to voice announce to the extension and transfer the call None Programming References Feature References Operation Reference User Manual Section 4 System Programming 990 System Additional Information Field 1 None DPT Features SLT Features Call Transfer to Extension Cal Transfer Unscreened to Extension Description Conditions Allows the user to transfer an intercom or CO call to directly transfer to an extension party After dialing the destination extension the user replaces the handset while hearing ringback tone e If the destination party
168. e 1 9 1 5 Specifications 1 5 1 General Description E KX TD816 System Capacity Control Method Switching Power Supplies Dialing Connector CO lines Stations 8 max CPU 16 bit CPU Non Blocking PCM Time Sharing Switch 16 max 32 max with eXtra Device Port Service Unit Primary Power KX TD816BX 115 200 220 240 VAC 50 60 Hz KX TD8 16HK ML NL NZ 220 240 VAC 50 60 Hz KX TD816C 120 VAC 60 Hz Secondary Station Supply Volt 30V Circuit Volt 5V 15V Power Failure e Memory backup duration seven years with a factory provided lithium battery e 4 CO lines max automatically assigned to stations Power Failure Transfer e System operation for about 10 minutes with optional Backup Battery and Adaptor Card KX A216 e System operation for about three hours using recommended batteries consisting of two 12 VDC car batteries Outward Dial Pulse DP 10 pps 20 pps Tone DTMF Dialing Internal Dial Pulse DP 10 pps 20 pps Tone DTMF Dialing Mode Conversion DP DTMF DTMF DP CO lines Service Unit Primary Power KX TD816BX HK ML 4 pin Connector KX TD816C NL NZ Modular Jack CA 14 A 1 10 System Outline 15 Specifications Stations Service Unit Connector KX TD816BX HK ML 4 pin Connector KX TD816C NL NZ Modular Jack Paging Output Pin Jack RCA JAC
169. e Call Forwarding to VPS CO Call DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N DISA System VPS C FWD IRNA Operator gt VM AA lr gt VM AA 2 A i y VM AA X ra VM AA 3 1 5 Listening to a Recorded Message If the VPS receives a message the VPS can turn on the MESSAGE button indicator of the corresponding telephone as a notification to the user of the telephone Panasonic KX TVP series can do this The VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in his her mailbox When the MESSAGE button indicator is lit pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the stored message 2 Automated Attendant AA Service 2 1 AA to Extension AA receives and answers a CO call and offers services such as transferring to a specified extension or the corresponding mailbox by the DTMF signaling which is sent from the calling party 3 132 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features Extension Conditions System VPS Transfer CAA UR RSE SSS Si AA A AA Hunting i Chain y AAX m r AA 3 Connection References CO Call DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N DISA A VPS can be assigned as the destination of the following features Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Call Forwar
170. e Last Number Redial e Line Access e One Touch Dialing e Pickup Dialing e Saved Number Redial e Station Speed Dialing e System Speed Dialing In Verified Toll Restriction Override mode the user can enter a pre assigned account code only when the user needs to override toll restriction In Option mode the user can enter any account code if needed e An account code can be stored into Memory Dialing System Station Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing Pickup Dialing Call Forwarding to CO Line e The Account button may be used in place of the feature number A flexible button on the proprietary telephone set can be programmed as the Account button e Account code entry after CPC detection must be done within 15 seconds Otherwise SMDR call record is activated and entry becomes impossible afterwards e If disconnection signal is selected in program 990 field 3 and Flash function is enabled in field 15 the Verified All Calls extension is allowed to make a CO call using the same line with Flash function Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Account code entry 105 Account Codes 508 Account Code Entry Mode 990 System Additional Information Fields 3 15 Station Programming cccecceeceseeeteeeteeeeenteeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Acco
171. e References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Paging group Paging group answer 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Section 3 Features Extension Group DPT Features SLT Features Paging Group Paging ANSWER Paging and Transfer Paralleled Telephone Description Conditions Any proprietary telephone can be connected in parallel with a single line telephone The following two combinations of telephones are available 1 APT SLT an analog proprietary telephone and a single line telephone device 2 DPT SLT a digital proprietary telephone and a single line telephone device When a parallel connection is made an extension user can make and answer a call using either telephone e The proprietary telephone PT can be used to perform normal operations whether or not the SLT is enabled e In the SLT DPT combination if one telephone goes off hook while the other telephone is on a call the call is switched to the former e In the SLT APT combination if one telephone goes off hook while the other telephone is on a call a three party call is established If one Features 3 93 P 3 Features user goes on hook the other user continues the call e When receiving a call The SLT is enabled Both the PT and the SLT ring except when the PT is in Handsfree Answerback mode or Voice Alerting mode The SLT is disabled PT rings but t
172. e Resistance 15 000 ohms Maximum Number of Station Instruments per Line 1 for KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 KX T7130 KX T7020 KX T7030 KX T7033 KX T7050 KX T7055 KX T7051 KX T7052 or single line telephone 2 by Parallel or eXtra Device Port Connection of a proprietary telephone and a single line telephone Ring Voltage 70 Vrms at 25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load Primary Power Service Unit Primary Power KX TD816BX 115 200 220 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 A max KX TD816HK ML NL NZ 220 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 A max KX TD816C 120 VAC 60 Hz 1 A max Central Office Loop Limit 1 600 ohms max Environmental Requirements 0 40 C 32 104 F 10 90 Hookswitch Flash Timing Range 84 1 000 milliseconds for KX TD816NL 204 1 000 milliseconds for the other systems E KX TD1232 Station Loop Limit KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 KX T7020 KX T7030 KX T7033 KX T7050 KX T7055 KX T7130 40 ohms Single Line Telephone KX T705 1 KX T7052 Sea 600 ohms including set Doorphon EE 20 ohms Minimum Leakage Resistance 15 000 ohms System Outline 1 13 15 Specifications Maximum Number of Station Instruments per Line 1 for KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 KX T7130 KX T7020 KX T7030 KX T7030 KX T7050 KX T7055 KX T7051 KX T7052 or single line telephone 2 by Parallel or eXtra Device Port Connection of a proprietary telephone and a single line telephone Ring Voltage
173. e for KX TD816C 1232C and System Programming 4 43 KX TD816HK 1232HK only 113 4 3 System Programming VM Status DTMF Set Description Sets the DTMF signals transmitted to your Voice Processing Selection Default System VPS to inform the VPS of the VPS ports states quickly The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF signals RBT ringback tone This signal is sent when calling an extension BT busy tone This is sent when the called extension is busy ROT reorder tone This is sent when the dialed number is invalid DND DND tone This is sent when the other extension has DND assigned Answer This is sent when the other extension answers the call Disconnect This is sent when the other extension hangs up Confirm confirmation tone This is sent when the feature number for Message Waiting Lamp is valid FWD VM RBT FWD to VM ringback tone Not available reserved FWD VM BT FWD to VM busy tone This is sent when the called extension has set Call Forwarding to VPS FWD EXT RBT FWD to extension ringback tone Not available reserved e RBT BT ROT DND Answer Disconnect Confirm FWD VM RBT FWD VM BT FWD EXT RBT e DTMF signal number 3 digits max RBT 1 BT 2 ROT 3 DND 4 Answer 5 Disconnect 9 Confirm 9 FWD VM RBT 6 FWD VM BT 7 FWD EXT RBT 8 Programming L Enter 113 Display VM Status Set 2 Press
174. e system except KX TD816C KX TD1232C has an internal music source However it may be necessary to connect a user supplied external music source such as a radio to the system Up to two external music sources for KX TD1232 and one external music source for KX TD816 can be connected per system It is required to select the internal or external music source by System Programming The music source is used for Music on Hold and or BGM In the case of KX TD1232 if external music sources are in use you can select a music source for each usage Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 9 External Music Source Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 803 Music Source Use 990 System Additional Information Field 20 Feature References Section 3 Features Background Music BGM Operation References Not applicable Night Service Description This supports both Night and Day modes of operation The system operation for originating and receiving calls can be different for day and night modes The system operation for restricting toll calls can be arranged separately to prevent unauthorized toll calls at night Switching of the Day Night Mode Day Night mode can be switched either automatically at a pre assigned time or manually by Operator 1 at any time desired Automatic Night Service If you select automatic switching mode your system will switch the Day Night mode at the programmed time each
175. e telephone the feature number is used e The memorized telephone number is replaced by a new one if at least one digit to be sent to a CO line is dialed Dialing a CO line access code alone does not change the memorized number e Certain type of proprietary telephones allows multiple redialing automatically Automatic Redial Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Last number redial Feature References Section 3 Features Redial Automatic Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Redial Last Number Features 3 99 R 3 Features Redial Saved Number Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to save a telephone number and redial the number afterwards The user can store it while in conversation on a CO line The saved number can be redialed many times until another one is stored Conditions e Certain types of proprietary telephones PT allow automatic multiple redialing Automatic Redial e If the SAVE button is not provided on your PT it is possible to assign a flexible button to be the SAVE button Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming eeeeeeeseeeeeses sereis srresrs sesers e User Manual Flexible Button Assignment SAVE Button Feature References Section 3 Features Button Flexible Redial Automatic Operation References DPT Features User Manual Redi
176. eatures Call Forwarding to CO Line 4 96 System Programming 4 7 COS Programming 505 Executive Busy Override Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform Executive Busy Override CO Line Extension Executive Busy Override allows the user to intrude into an established call e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS e Disable Enable All COS Disable 1 Enter 505 Display Busy Override 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Section 3 Features Executive Busy Override CO Line Executive Busy Override Extension System Programming 4 97 506 4 7 COS Programming Executive Busy Override Deny Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References This program is used to determine which Classes of Serv
177. eatures SLT Features User Manual System Speed Dialing 3 116 Features 3 Features Time Out Variable Description Provides timers to control various features or functions The following timers are programmable System Timer Items Automatic Redial Interval Time Automatic Redial Repeated Times Call Forwarding No Answer Time Out CO Dial Starting Time CO to CO Call Duration Time DISA CO to CO Call Prolong Time DISA Delayed Answer Time Extension to CO Call Duration Time Hold Recall Time Intercept Routing Time Out Outgoing Message Duration Time Pickup Dialing Waiting Time SMDR Duration Count Starting Time Toll Restriction First Digit Time Out Toll Restriction Inter digit Time Out Transfer Recall Time CO Line Group Timer Items Disconnect Time Hookswitch Flash Time Pause Time CO Line Timer Items CPC Signal Detection Time Incoming DTMF Digit Time Extension Timer Items Delayed Ringing Count Voice Mail Integration Timer Items DTMF Signal Duration DTMF Signal Waiting Time after VPS Answer Range n x 10s n 3 120 1 30 times 1 12 rings n x 100 ms n 0 40 1 64 min 0 7 min 0 6 rings 1 64 min 0 240s 3 48 rings 0 16 32 64s 1 5s 0 605 5 120s 5 30s 3 48 rings 1 5 4 0 s Disable 80 96 112 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 ms LS 23 7335 74 3 s Disable 100 200 300 400 500
178. ed Message Waiting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb functions if any e A Floating Station cannot be programmed as the forwarded destination Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time Station Programming ccceccceccceseeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button Section 3 Features Call Forwarding Busy Call Forwarding No Answer DPT Features SLT Features Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 23 C 3 Features Call Forwarding Follow Me Description Conditions If you forget to set Call Forwarding All Calls before you leave your desk this allows you to set the same function from the destination extension e Same as the conditions of Call Forwarding All Calls e It is programmable to enable or disable this feature on Class of Service basis Programming References Featu
179. en by another higher priority it is interrupted and starts again when the higher priority is finished e If System Connection is established up to four pagers are available e The confirmation tone is sent to the extensions and external pager when the paging is made or answered Eliminating the tone is programmable e The confirmation tone is sent from external pagers before the voice announcement Eliminating the tone is programmable Section 2 Installation 2 3 8 External Pager Paging Equipment Connection Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Paging external Paging external answer TAFAS answer 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone 990 System Additional Information Field 16 None DPT Features SLT Features Paging External Paging ANSWER Paging and Transfer 3 92 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features P Paging Group Description Conditions Allows you to select an extension group and make a voice announcement All the proprietary telephones in the group will receive the page If a member of the paged group answers your paging you can talk to the person through the connected line e To select all groups pages all extensions e Confirmation tone is sent when the page is made or answered Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Featur
180. ension Connect pins D1 and D2 only T and R are not necessary Station Wiring 3 pair twisted cabling 50 Pin Connector Block Terminal Green 26 Red S Black Yellow White Blue Line cord OD Jr JH W r E N ojal A N Bridging Clips 2 26 Installation 2 3 3 Extension Connection for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles Notes e Up to four DSS Consoles KX T7040 or KX T7240 can be installed per system As the DSS Console itself cannot work alone it always requires a proprietary telephone used in pair Place the DSS Console and the paired telephone side by side on your desk e It is necessary to designate the jack numbers of paired DSS Consoles and the proprietary telephones by system programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment 109 Expansion Unit Type Feature References Section 3 Features DSS Console KX T7240 KX T7040 Module Expansion Note After completing all the required inside cabling including CO lines extensions external pagers and external music sources fasten the cables with the nylon tie included as shown Installation 2 27 2 3 4 Optional Extension Connection of KX A205 Clip Termina
181. ent Day Night Station Programming ccccccceecceseeceeeteeeeceteenseees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Loop CO L CO Button Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Features 3 17 B 3 Features Feature References Section 3 Features Answering Direct CO Line Line Access Direct LED Indication CO Line Ringing Delayed Line Access Automatic Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Operation References DPT Features User Manual Outward Dialing Line Access Automatic Button Single CO S CO Description A Single CO S CO button is a CO line access button This allows the proprietary telephone user to access a specific line by pressing an S CO button An incoming call can be directed to an S CO button Conditions e The default setting for CO buttons is changeable Flexible CO Button e An S CO button provides CO line status e It is possible to assign one CO line to both an S CO and a G CO button e If Automatic Route Selection ARS is set it is overridden by an outgoing call made by pressing the S CO button e Incoming calls appear on the proprietary telephone when an extension is assigned as the incoming call destination and an S CO G CO and or L CO button is assigned e Immediate delayed no ringing or no incoming call disable can be selected on an extension CO line basis e The digital PT user can choose a desired ringing tone type for the S CO button by System or Station
182. ent call on hold allows the user to have a conversation with the other party Call Splitting is impossible during Doorphone Call or Paging Programming References Feature References No programming required None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Call Splitting 3 32 Features 3 Features C CALL TRANSFER FEATURES SUMMARY Description Call Transfer features allow the user to transfer a call to another party This operation can be screened or unscreened Screened call transfer is used when you want to announce the call to the other party before completing the transfer Unscreened call transfer immediately releases the caller to the called party An intercom or a CO call can be transferred to an extension or to an outside party by Call Transfer Screened to CO Line Call Transfer Screened to Extension Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension Call Transfer Screened to CO Line Description Conditions Allows the proprietary telephone user to voice announce to the external party and transfer the call e Class of Service programming determines the extensions that are able to perform it e Ifa call between two external parties is established by this feature the duration of the call period is restricted by a system timer Hold Recall is generated to the extension who transferred the call 50 seconds before the time out Also Hold Alarm tone is generated to both outsid
183. entralized telephone Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e Button Code plus parameter if required Button Code Parameter 0 Single CO KX TD816 01 through 08 CO line number KX TD1232 01 through 24 CO line number 1 DSS 2 through 4 digits Extension number 2 One Touch 16 digits max Telephone number 3 Message Waiting None 4 FWD DND None 5 Save None 6 Account None 7 Conference None 8 Voice Mail Transfer 2 through 4 digits Extension number Loop CO None Group CO 1 through 8 CO line group number CO ringer frequency 1 through 8 ring tone type number Default e KX TD816 All jacks CO buttons through 8 Single CO 01 through 08 Ring tone type 2 e KX TD1232 All jacks CO buttons through 24 Single CO 01 through 24 Ring tone type 2 Programming 1 Enter 005 Display Flexible Key Asn 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display PTI PGM Mode System Programming 4 23 005 4 2 Manager Programming Flexible CO Button Assignment contd Canceling Conditions Feature References 4 Press a CO button to be changed The display shows the contents pre assigned to the button Display example CO O1 5 Enter a button code plus parameter if required To change the parameter press CLEAR
184. er 9 pin If you connect an IBM PC or the printer with 9 pin EIA RS 232C connector to your system see the chart below EIA RS 232C port on the main unit 25 pin EIA RS 232C port on the printer IBM PC 9 pin Note unit to the printer cable SE Signal Pin Pin Signal See EIA Name No No Name EIA AA FG 1 BA SD TXD gt RD RXD BB BB RD RXD 3 SD TXD BA CA RS RTS 4 ER DTR CD CB CS CTS 5 SG AB CC DR DSR 6 CR DSR CC AB SG H RS RTS CA CD ER DTR 20 CS CTS CB Please read your printer manual and connect the first EIA pin FG of this Installation 2 3 10 Printer Connection EIA RS 232C Signals Frame Ground FG Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord Transmitted Data SD TXD ccc cceeeeeeteeeeeee output Conveys signals from the unit to the printer A Mark condition is held unless data or BREAK signals are being transmitted Received Data RDORSID cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee input Conveys signals from the printer Request to Send RS RS output This lead is held ON whenever DR DSR is ON Clear To Send CS CT input An ON condition of circuit CS CTS indicates that the printer is ready to receive data from the unit The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data when circuit CS CTS is OFF Data Set Ready DR DS
185. er a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 1 4 Enter a level number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Section 3 Features Night Service Toll Restriction System Programming 4 93 502 4 7 COS Programming Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References This program allows you to restrict the duration of CO calls on a Class of Service COS basis e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS e Disable no limit Enable limit All COS Disable 1 Enter 502 Display CO Durat Limit 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e ACO call originated or answered by the progra
186. er a DISA user code number To enter user code number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example Codel 1111 COS 1 4 Enter a DISA user code To change the current entry enter the new code 5 Press to program COS 6 Enter a COS number To change the current entry enter the new COS number 7 Press STORE 8 To program another user code press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DISA user code number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END e This setting is required if Trunk CO line Security mode is selected in program 809 DISA Security Type e There are four programmable user codes Each code should be unique composed of four numerical digits 0 through 9 e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA Available for KX TD1232 only System Programming 4 121 S812 4 9 Resource Programming DISA DTMF Repeat Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Selects whether the system transmits DTMF signals directly to the central office CO or if the system repeats the DTMF signals to CO in order to adjust gain This can be done for a DISA CO to CO call during dialing and or during an established call e Dial during dialing Call during an established call e Mode Repeat Through Dial and Call Repeat 1 Enter 812 Display DISA DIMF Repeat 2 Press NEXT to program the mode durin
187. ered before the programmed number of rings the call returns to the original caller Number of rings 3 through 48 12 rings 1 Enter 201 Display Transfer Recall 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 12 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e One ring is equivalent to five seconds e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension System Programming 4 5 202 4 4 Timer Programming Call Forwarding No Answer Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the number of rings for the Call Forwarding No Answer feature If a call is not answered before the programmed number of rings the call is forwarded to the destination Number of rings 1 through 12 3 rings 1 Enter 202 Display No Answer Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 3 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e One ring is equivalent to five seconds e This timer is also used for Intercept Routing If an incoming DISA call to the Intercept Routing destination is not answered before this timer expires the call will be disconnected e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Call Forwarding
188. erences Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Pickup dialing program set cancel 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time None DPT Features SLT Features Pickup Dialing Hot Line Features 3 95 P 3 Features Power Failure Restart Description Turning back on the electricity the system restarts the stored data automatically Before restarting the system records the error logs if necessary Conditions e In the case of KX TD1232 if System Connection is established the Slave System makes a copy of the restored data of the Master system e In the event of a power failure system memory is protected by the factory provided lithium battery There is no memory loss except the memories of Camp On and Call Park Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Power Failure Transfer Description If a power failure should happen or during a system off line state specific extension telephone instruments are automatically connected straight to specific CO lines This provides CO line conversations between the following extensions and CO lines KX TD816 CO is connected to extension jack number 1 CO 2 is connected to extension jack number 2 CO 5 is connected to extension jack number 9 CO 6 is connected to extension jack number 10 KX TD1232 CO 1 is connected to extension jack number 1 CO 2 is connected to extensi
189. ernal pager is assigned as the DIL 1 1 destination In this case all the incoming calls on the specified line will be signaled b A DISA caller dials the floating number of an external pager c The floating number of an external pager is assigned as the Intercept Routing destination In this case incoming calls redirected to the destination will be signaled e Confirmation tone is sent to the user before being connected to the caller Eliminating the tone is programmable 3 128 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features V Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 8 External Pager Paging Equipment Connection Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Paging external answer TAFAS answer 813 Floating Number Assignment 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Section 3 Features Floating Station DPT Features SLT Features Trunk CO Line Answer From Any Station TAFAS Voice Mail Integration Description This system can accommodate Voice Processing System VPS equipment which offers the user a Voice Mail and Automated Attendant Services If an extension user has set Call Forwarding destination to the VPS a calling party will be forwarded to the VPS and can leave a voice message in the mailbox of the extension When a call is transferred to the VPS by the Call Forwarding or Inter
190. es ee Ae D E ti H ra Notes e To erase all the letters press CLEAR e To erase the last letter press lt M4 Mid Mik Mik3 Mike System Programming 4 11 4 1 4 Example of Programming The following programming instructions suppose that you have already entered programming mode and that you will employ method 2 on page 4 8 Example Program 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set Sample of Description Explanation 001 4 2 Manager Programming System Speed Dialing Number Set Default Description Selection Used to program the System Speed Dial numbers These numbers are available to all extension users There are 100 numbers from 00 through 99 e Speed dial number 00 through 99 e Telephone number 24 digits max All speed dial numbers Not stored Programming 1 Enter 001 Display SPD Number set 2 Press NEXT Display SPD Code gt qi 3 Enter a speed dial number To enter speed dial number 00 you can also press NEXT Display example 00 Not Stored 4 Enter a telephone number To delete the current entry press CLEAR Ui To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE US 6 To program another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 8 Press END 16 6 17 d w Program addre
191. es Determines the amount of time between successive accesses to the same CO line e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 all CO line groups e Time seconds 1 5 4 0 All CO line groups 1 5 s 1 Enter 414 Display TRG Discnct Time 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter a CO line group number To program CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 1 5sec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e The disconnect time must be longer than the requirements of the central office or the host PBX e To assign all CO line groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 e Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign each CO line to a CO line group Section 3 Features Flash 4 90 System Programming 4 5 CO Line Programming 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set Description Enables or disables CPC Signal Detection during the time between the originated CO call and the established CO call If this is enabled the system disconnects the line with the time set in program 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set when CPC Signal is detected Selection e CO line number KX
192. es 4 54 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Tme 4 55 206 CO to CO Call Duration Time cccccesesscceseceeeesensnees 4 56 SEET First Digit tee ee 4 57 208 Inter Digit Kr 4 58 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times s ssssseeessesesseessseesseesseessee 4 59 210 Automatic Redial Interval Tme ccccccccccceeeeeeesseeeees 4 60 211 TALS tart TEEN 4 61 212 Call Duration Count Start Time 0 cc cccceccccccceeeeeenteeeees 4 62 213 DISA Delayed Answer Time ENEE 4 63 2 214 Ereegnesser ee eege 4 64 2 215 Outgoing Message KE 4 65 4 5 TRS ARS Programming sseessossssecssocesocescocssocessecesocesocesoosesseessee 4 66 300 TRS Override for System Speed Dialing eee 4 66 14 Available for KX TD816C 1232C and KX TD816HK 1232HK only 2 Available for KX TD1232 only Contents 4 6 4 7 4 8 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 4 67 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 4 68 311 Special Carrier Access Codes jsccjcccsateensssssesevesacasartonecsdceeseders 4 69 B2 ARS ee 4 70 313 eh re 4 71 314 321 ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 4 72 322 329 ARS Routing Plans 1 through NA 4 73 330 ARS Modify Removed Die 4 75 331 ARS Modify Added Number 4 76 CO Line Programming ssssssecsseossececosccoosssocesocossooccocscoosessessseesssse 4 77 400 CO Line Connection Assignment sssesss
193. es an alarm tone is sent from the built in speaker of a proprietary telephone PT or from the handset receiver of a single line telephone at 15 second intervals Conditions e Hold Recall can be disabled by programming e The display PT flashes the indication of the held party for five seconds at 15 second intervals synchronized with the tone e Alarm tone is sent as follows Le Programming References Section 4 System Programming 200 Hold Recall Time Feature References Section 3 Features Call Hold CO Line Call Hold Exclusive CO Line Call Hold Intercom Call Hold Exclusive Intercom Operation References Not applicable Features 3 71 HI Host PBX Access Description Conditions 3 Features The system may be installed behind an existing host PBX This is performed by connecting a line from the host to a CO line in the Digital Super Hybrid System e To enable Host PBX Access put the host PBX line in a CO line group The user accesses the host PBX by selecting that CO line e A Host PBX Access Code is required to access CO lines of the host PBX e A pause if programmed can be inserted between the user dialed Host PBX Access Code and the following digits Automatic Pause Insertion Program the pause time required by the Host PBX for that CO line group e Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible External Feature Access Programming References Feature Reference
194. es the caller to override the DND programmed on the called extension s telephone and causes the telephone to ring Conditions Class of Service COS programming determines the extension users who can perform DND Override Programming References Section 4 System Programming 507 Do Not Disturb Override Feature References Section 3 Features Do Not Disturb DND Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Do Not Disturb DND Override Door Opener Description Allows the extension users to unlock the door for a visitor from their telephones The door can be unlocked by extension users who have been programmed to receive doorphone calls However while engaged on a doorphone call any extension user can open the door from the telephone to let the visitor in 3 56 Features 3 Features D Conditions Connection References It is needed to install a user supplied door opener on each door to be opened Two door openers can be installed on each system System Connection provides for four door openers Section 2 Installation 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Doorphone Call Description Conditions Connection References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Door opener 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Section 3 Features Doorphone Call DPT Features
195. es will discharge e To charge the discharged batteries use a proper charging unit e Power Fuse 8A 32V x2 If the Power LED light goes off during a power failure the power fuse may have been blown To change the fuse 1 2 Fuse Holder d _ CRT Om e 5 Kw Turn the power switch off Turn the fuse holder in the direction of Arrow 8 while pushing it in the direction of Arrow Change the fuse Turn the fuse holder in the direction of Arrow while pushing it in the direction of Arrow Turn the power switch on e Back up Duration depends on the amp hour of the batteries used e g When using two 12 VDC batteries 20 amp hour maintenance free car batteries the power is maintained for about three hours Installation 2 73 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer Power Failure Transfer connects a specific single line telephones to selected CO lines in the event of system power failure as follows KX TD816 CO 1 Extension T R Jack 1 CO 2 Extension T R Jack 2 CO 5 Extension T R Jack 9 CO 6 Extension T R Jack 10 Connections of CO 1 CO 2 and the respective extensions require no auxiliary connection CO 5 and CO 6 require auxiliary connection to implement this feature KX TD1232 CO 1 Extension T R Jack 1 CO 2 Extension T R Jack 2 CO 3 Extension T R Jack 9 CO 4 Extension T R Jack 10 CO 9 Extens
196. ess NEXT Display example CO01 DTMF 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available To assign all lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COO1 If DTMF is assigned set the DTMF time of the line in program 404 DTMF Time If pulse or call blocking is assigned set the pulse speed of the line in program 403 Pulse Speed Selection and set the pulse break ratio and inter digit pause in program 990 System Additional Information Field 17 and in Field 21 if needed Feature References Section 3 Features Dial Type Selection Conditions System Programming 4 79 403 4 5 CO Line Programming Pulse Speed Selection Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References A CO line set for pulse or call blocking mode in program 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two pulse rates 10 pps low and 20 pps high This program sets the pulse speed for each CO line set to pulse or call blocking mode e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x al
197. et is not used set phone mode with a HEADSET selector of the HANDSET HEADSET proprietary telephone KX T7130 KX T7030 or KX T7033 nothing is audible e When using the speaker phone monitor mode with a DPT KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7 250 nothing is audible the KX T7130 KX T7030 or KX T7033 is set to the HEADSET position e The HEADSET mode is selected by Station Programming Handset Headset Selection selector to the HANDSET position e When the headset is not used select the HANDSET mode by Station Programming The unit does not ring The Ringer Volume Selector is set to OFF Set to HIGH or LOW 6 4 Troubleshooting 6 1 Troubleshooting PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION During a power interrup e A DPT or APT is e Disconnect the DPT or APT and tion extensions connected connected to the jack connect a single line telephone to jack numbers 1 2 9 10 The dialing mode tone or Set the Tone Pulse switch to the for KX TD816 and 1 2 9 pulse is improper other position 10 17 18 for KX TD1232 do not operate During system connection Interface between the Connect the interface between the operation for KX TD1232 systems is disconnected systems and press the Reset Button originating an intercom on both systems CO call from a system to the other system is not possible Origi
198. expansion cards to connect both systems must be installed for this feature Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 9 System Connection Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Not applicable System Data Default Set Description This system permits re initialization of system programmed data If all the programmed data is cleared the system will restart with the default setting Conditions The default setting for each programming item is listed in Section 5 2 Default Values Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Section 2 Installation 2 8 System Data Clear Features 3 113 S 3 Features System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer Description Conditions This system can be programmed and administered using a personal computer The EIA Remote Programming amp Diagnosis floppy is required to perform this feature The KX TD816 cannot perform the diagnosis There are two programming methods On Site Programming By connecting a personal computer PC to your system system programming and maintenance can be performed locally There are two ways available to perform the above Method 1 Using the EIA RS 232C port Connect the PC to the EIA RS 232C port provided The main unit has an EIA RS 232C port which can be used for either system administration or SMDR Met
199. f available to an extension group Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e Extension group number 1 through 8 Default All jacks 1 2 Extension group 1 Programming 1 Enter 602 Display EXT Group Asn 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 EXG1 4 Enter the extension group number To change the current entry enter the new extension group number Press STORE To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions e There is a maximum of eight extension groups Each extension can only belong to one group e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 e To assign all jacks to one extension group press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Feature References Section 3 Features Call Pickup Group Station Hunting Extension Group Voice Mail Integration Paging Group System Programming 4 103 603 604 4 8 E
200. for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group 3 24 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features C e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb functions if any A Floating Station cannot be programmed as the forwarded destination Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time Station Programming 0 cccccceecceseeteeeneeeeenteenseees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding to CO Line Description Conditions Calls directed to your extension will be sent to an external destination The outside telephone number must be pre programmed e Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are CO calls DIL 1 1 DISA Intercom calls Extension Transfer e The forwarding extension s Toll Restriction Automatic Route Selection ARS and Account Code Entry requirements still apply e Although calls are forwarded Message Waiting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Hunting
201. for KX TD1232 use the optional 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 This unit can be installed to any of the expansion unit areas provided on the front of the main unit For 4 CO Line Unit Installation see Section 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 e System Programming is required for card location identification e If you intend to attach a Caller ID Card to the 4 CO Line Unit attach it before CO line connection See Section 2 4 7 Caller ID Card Installation Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 109 Expansion Unit Type Section 3 Features Module Expansion 2 4 3 8 Station Line Unit Connection Notes To add eight extensions jack numbers 9 through 16 for KX TD816 and jack numbers 17 through 24 for KX TD1232 use the optional 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 To add 16 extensions for KX TD1232 jack numbers 17 through 32 use two 8 Station Line Units This unit can be installed to any of the expansion unit areas provided on the front of the main unit For Extension Expansion Unit Installation see Section 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 System Programming is required for card location identification Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 109 Expansion Unit Type Section 3 Features Module Expansion Installation 2 49 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 KX TD816
202. g dialing To program the mode during an established call press NEXT again Display example Dial Repeat 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to program the mode during an established call Display example Call Repeat 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 7 Press STORE 8 Press END None Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA 4 122 System Programming Available for KX TD1232 only 4 9 Resource Programming 813 Floating Number Assignment Description Assigns the floating numbers for External Pagers DISA messages and the modem These numbers can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access Selection e Floating station KX TD816 Pager1 KX TD1232 Pager Pager2 Pager3 Pager4 DISA1 DISA2 MODEM e Floating number 2 through 4 digits Default KX TD816 Pager 1 196 KX TD1232 Pager 1 196 Pager 2 197 Pager 3 296 Pager 4 297 DISA 1 198 DISA 2 298 MODEM 299 Programming 1 Enter 813 Display FLT EXT NO 2 Press NEXT to program Pager 1 Display example Pagerl EXT196 To program another floating station for KX TD1232 keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired floating station is displayed 3 Enter a floating number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new floating number 4 Press STORE 5 To program another flo
203. ge 2 12 2 3 1 System Connection E oas 2 12 2 3 2 CO Line Connection EE 2 16 2 3 3 Extension Connection 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 3 6 2 3 1 2 3 8 2 3 9 for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles 2 19 Optional Extension Connection of KX A205 Clip Terminal 2 28 Paralleled Telephone Connection for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone 0 000 2 30 EXtra Device Port XDP Connection for a Digital Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone 2 32 Polarity Sensitive Telephone Connection n 2 33 External Pager Paging Equipment Connection s eesseeees 2 34 External Music Source Ett egeegg dueegdree ireE ig 2 36 Available for KX TD1232 only 2 Available for KX TD816C 1232C and KX TD816HK 1232HK only 3 Available for KX TD816 only Contents 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 Section 3 A 2 3 10 Printer Connection sesessseseessessressesserersserssressesssersssseessees 2 3 11 Installation of Lightning Drotectors Installation of Optional Cards and Units seesssecssocssooesoosessesssee 2 4 1 Location of Optional Cards and Unts eee eeeeeeeeee 2 4 2 4 CO Line Unit Connection geegent 2 4 3 8 Station Line Unit Connection ccccccccsssosccessasessosssesencsess 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 7 KX TD1 80 cissbcsicesasecsensssesiacsasnecedvsaggastsaussncesee 2 4 5 DISA Card Installation cscicccisssssccsascssesssasseccsasna
204. gramming 4 3 System Programming 108 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Enables or disables the function of automatically holding the CO call when a DSS button on the DSS Console or proprietary telephone is pressed Enable Disable Enable 1 Enter 108 Display DSS Auto Hold 2 Press NEXT Display example Auto HLD Enable 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END This assignment applies to all DSS buttons on all DSS Consoles and on all proprietary telephones in the system Section 3 Features One Touch Transfer by DSS Button System Programming 4 39 109 4 3 System Programming Expansion Unit Type Description Selection Default Programming Assigns the type of expansion units to be used in the system This allows the system to identify the unit in each expansion unit location KX TD816 e Areas 1 2 C1 E1 E1 C1 C1 4 CO Line Unit E1 8 Station Line Unit KX TD1232 e Master Slave e Areas 1 2 3 C1 E1 E2 C1 E2 E1 E1 E2 C1 E1 C1 E2 E2 E1 C1 E2 C1 E1 C1 4 CO Line Unit E1 8 Station Line Unit 1 E2 8 Station Line Unit 2 KX TD816 CIE KX TD1232 Master and Slave C1 E1 E2 KX TD816 1 Enter 109 Display Expansion Card 2 Press NEXT Display example C1 E1 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection i
205. gramming Caller ID Code Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the identification code of the calling party Caller ID Code to utilize Caller ID Service provided by a specific central office CO If an ID Code transmitted from CO is found in Caller ID Code Table the caller s ID Code or a name given to the code in program 111 Caller ID Name Set is displayed on the telephone allowing the called party to recognize the caller e Location number 001 through 500 e Caller ID Code 11 digits max All locations Not stored 1 Enter 110 Display Caller ID Code 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 Not Stored 4 Enter a Caller ID Code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new code 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 250 Caller ID Codes Each code has a maximum of 11 digits consisting of 0 through 9 e Program 111 Caller ID Name Set is used to give names to Caller ID Codes If an ID Code is given a name the called party s telephone shows the name in place of the ID Code e Program 406 Caller ID Assignment is used to enable C
206. he SLT does not ring However the SLT can answer the phone When the SLT is in operation the display and LED indicator on the paired PT will show in the same way as if the PT is in operation If APT SLT are used the extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the APT is playing BGM in programming mode receiving a paging announcement over the built in speaker If eXtra Device Port feature is available a DPT SLT can act as completely different extensions e Call Waiting tone can be heard only by PT Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 5 Paralleled Telephone Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Parallel telephone mode set cancel Feature References Section 3 Features EXtra Device Port XDP Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Paralleled Telephone Connection Pause Insertion Automatic Description This function is used to insert a pre assigned pause between the CO line access number the host PBX Centrex or carrier access code and the successively dialed digits Conditions e This feature requires previous programming of CO line access number host PBX Centrex and special carrier access codes as well as assignment of the pause duration e This feature works for Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing Last Number Redial Saved Number Redial Pickup Dialing Call Forwarding to CO Line as well as for ordinar
207. he cord of the adaptor card to the backup battery connector Adaptor Card Notes Make sure of the polarities of the battery Backup Battery Connector Available for KX TD1232 only Installation 2 71 2 4 11 Battery Adaptor Connection Connection Battery Adaptor Car batteries User supplied car batteries can be used as a backup power supply in the event of a power failure In case of power failure the batteries automatically maintain the power to the main unit instantly The optional Battery Adaptor model KX A46 is required The Battery Adaptor should not be exposed to direct sunlight Keep the adaptor and car batteries away from heating appliances and fire Place car batteries in an airy place When connecting the battery adaptor keep the following in mind e Make sure of the polarities of batteries and wires e Make sure that you do not short the batteries and wires e To connect the two batteries use accessory wire Reet Slows 1 Assemble the cords and two car batteries Accessory wir
208. he desired jack number 4 104 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 603 604 DIL IN Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night conta Conditions Feature References 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END e For KX TD1232 this program has been modified from CO Line Group basis to CO Line number basis The current program is applicable to ROM version P011J and ROM versions from PO11N Accordingly those ROM version models require the Version 2 xx software for EIA Remote Programming and Diagnosis Other ROM version models require the Version 1 xx software Confirm the ROM version of your main unit 116 ROM Version Display For KX TD816 this program is applicable to all ROM version models and all ROM version models require the Version 2 xx software for EIA Remote Programming and Diagnosis An extension can be assigned as the destination of as many CO lines as is required In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 To assign all jacks or all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 or step 4 In these cases the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 or for CO line 01 There are six notification methods 1 Immediate ringing rings immediately 2 1
209. he levels 1 and 2 are not changed e A Class of Service which is assigned Account Code Entry Verified Toll Restriction Override permits the class members to override their toll restrictions e Up to 20 account codes can be programmed for Verified Account code operation These are used for Toll Restriction Override e If the user does not enter any account code or enters an invalid account code an ordinary toll restriction check is done 3 126 Features 3 Features T Flow Chart of TRS Override by Account Code Entry TRS Override by Account Code Entry is attempted Option y Verified All Calls What is the account code mode Verified Toll Restriction Override No y a Js the entered code identified with the stored codes Yes Yes 7 Is the entered code identified L Is the TRS level Level 1 with the stored code No Yes No TRS level changes to Level 2 The call is not allowed Toll Restriction check starts Leg Reorder tone is returned to the user Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Account code entry 508 Account Code Entry Mode Feature References Section 3 Features Account Code Entry Toll Restriction Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Toll Restriction Override Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry Fe
210. he mailbox of the desired extension without knowing the mailbox number 3 130 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features V CO Call DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N DISA System VPS IRNA Extension gt VM1 Froen gt VM2 A VM Hunting d Chain VMX ran VM 3 1 3 Transferring to VM The extension user can transfer a CO call to the VPS so that calling party can leave his her message in the mailbox of the desired extension The extension user should use the Voice Mail VM Transfer button when transferring a call to the VPS Pressing this button and entering the extension number allows the extension user to transfer the call to the mailbox of the corresponding extension CO Call System 1 Transfer MES 2 Transfer Extension a Extension _ gt gt VM1 f Si VM2 SE Operator by VM Transfer A usy no answer Button VM Hunting i i Chain y VMX mr VM 3 Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 131 3 Features 1 4 Changing from VM to Automated Attendant AA The Automated Attendant Service is automatically activated in the following cases 1 The incoming call is not answered by the operator and IRNA is activated 2 The operator is assigned as a destination of DIL 1 1 and the operator sets th
211. he main unit and secure the screws Installation 2 63 2 4 7 Caller ID Card Installation 2 Installing to the Optional 4 CO Line Unit Note The following procedures must be done before installing the 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 to the main unit Loosen five screws located on the rear of the 4 CO Line Unit Remove the back plate and take out the P board Attach the Caller ID Card to the P board fitting the connectors Put the P board back into the cabinet and fix the rear plate with the five screws WP 4 Caller ID Card back plate P board For installing the 4 CO Line Unit to the main unit refer to Section 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 110 Caller ID Code Set 111 Caller ID Name Set 406 Caller ID Assignment Section 3 Features Caller ID 2 64 Installation 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection To connect up to two doorphones KX T30865 and up to two door openers user supplied a Doorphone Card KX TD160 is required Installing the Doorphone Doorphone Card Installation 1 Loosen the screw to separate the 1 Connect a 4 conductor modular connector doorphone into two halves to the Doorphone Card Cabinet and pass the cord through the groove on the cabinet SCrew 2 Install the base cover to the w
212. he same code is used to unlock it Conditions e Making intercom calls and receiving intercom or CO calls are permitted on the locked station e Remote Station Lock Control overrides Electronic Station Lockout If Operator 1 sets Remote Station Lock on a station that has already been locked by the station user the user cannot unlock it e It is programmable to admit the press of the FLASH button during a CO call on the locked station Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Electronic station lockout set cancel 3 60 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features E Feature References Operation References User Manual 990 System Additional Information Field 15 Section 3 Features Remote Station Lock Control DPT Features SLT Features Electronic Station Lockout End to End DTMF Signaling Tone Through Description Conditions DTMF signaling is required for access to special network services offered by some telephone companies This system allows the proprietary telephone user to send DTMF signals to the line during an established call e If the dial type of the line is assigned to DTMF Tone Through mode is established automatically after the dialing sequence is finished and the call is established e If the dial type of the line is assigned to dial pulse Tone Through mode is established after the dialing sequence is finished and the buttons are pres
213. hod 2 Using a modem Install the optional Remote Card Connect the PC to an extension jack Assign the floating number of the modem in System Programming Dial this number from the PC Remote Programming You can perform system programming and maintenance from a remote site using a PC Install the Remote Card and assign the floating number of the modem in System Programming Starting system administration from a remote location can be done in the following ways e Call an extension probably the Operator from a remote location and request a transfer to the modem e Dial the floating number of the modem using the DISA feature e Assign the modem as the destination of the DIL 1 1 feature e For KX TD1232 the ROM version P011J and the ROM versions from PO11N require the Version 2 xx software for E A Remote Programming and Diagnosis Other ROM version models require Version 1 xx software For KX TD816 all ROM version models require the Version 1 xx software for EI A Remote Programming and Diagnosis A proprietary telephone can be used to perform System Programming Only one access is allowed to System Programming at any one time To access system administration a valid password must be entered The password is factory programmed and can be changed 3 114 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features S e System administration can be performed on line except for the procedures of the diagnosis If the system goes off line
214. hows you what you should do or what you should select It also allows you to confirm what you have just entered The display capacity is 16 digits If your entry exceeds the capacity you can shift the display by pressing or lt button The Function Line lower shows the current function of the soft buttons These functions change with the programming procedures SYS PGM NO gt lt Message Line NEXT f lt Function Line KX T7230 Display SYS PGM NO gt lt Message Line lt Function Line KX T7235 Display Before entering the programming mode Before entering programming mode confirm that e Your telephone is on hook e No calls are on hold at your telephone Entering the programming mode Press PROGRAM or PAUSE and enter your System Password default 1234 e The display shows the Initial Message SYS PGM NO gt Notes e Jf your telephone set has no PROGRAM button substitute the PAUSE button e If nothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM or PAUSE button is pressed it is cancelled e The System Password entered is not shown on the display The System Password can be changed by System Programming Refer to Section 4 3 107 System Password e During the programming mode your extension is treated as a busy extension e Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any one time 4 6 System Programming 4 1 2 Programming Ways
215. htning Protectors Installation of the KX A207 Internal Music Source Section 2 3 9 External Music Source Connection Section 3 Background Music BGM Background Music BGM External Music on Hold Section 4 10 990 System Additional Information Field 20 KX TD816NL KX TD1232NL Automatic Redial Section 3 Redial Automatic Section 4 4 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time Information Model Number of Unavailable Related Section Main Unit Feature Item KX TD816NL Calling Party Control Section 3 KX TD1232NL CPC Signal Calling Party Control CPC Detection Signal Detection Section 4 6 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set Pulse to Tone Section 3 Conversion Pulse to Tone Conversion Handset Headset Section 3 Volume Selector Volume Control Handset Receiver Headset Conversation between Section 3 two outside parties except using DISA feature Call Forwarding to CO Line Call Transfer Screened to CO Line Conference Unattended Section 4 4 206 CO to CO Call Duration Time Contents Section 1 System Outline LI System Highlhiehts seezgegrsgegesresgseesbegugegtsgesgegrssgeruusgiereuesegetustegreegerg 1 2 1 2 Basic System Construction
216. ices COS are allowed to deny Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override Deny allows the user to prevent Executive Busy Override CO Line Extension from being executed by another extension user e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS e Disable Enable All COS Enable 1 Enter 506 Display Busy Over Deny 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Section 3 Features Executive Busy Override CO Line Executive Busy Override Extension System Programming 4 98 4 7 COS Programming 507 Do Not Disturb Override Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References This program determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform Do Not Disturb DND Override e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS e Disable Enable All COS Disable 1 Enter 507 Display DND Override 2 Press NEXT Display C
217. ieving a held intercom call Only the user who held it can retrieve the call e Only one intercom call can be placed on Call Hold or Exclusive Call Hold at a time e If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Hold Recall results After Hold Recall results the held call can be retrieved from any other extension e Music is sent to the party on hold if available Music on Hold Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 200 Hold Recall Time Section 3 Features Hold Recall Music on Hold DPT Features Call Hold Exclusive Call Hold Retrieve CO Line Description Allows the extension user to retrieve a specified CO call that has been placed on hold by another extension 3 28 Features 3 Features C Conditions Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by the feature number Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call hold retrieve CO line 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Section 3 Features Call Hold CO Line DPT Features SLT Features Call Hold Retrieve Call Hold Retrieve Intercom Description Conditions Allows the extension user to retrieve a call that has been placed on hold by another extension Confirmatio
218. if the EIA RS 232C cable is connected If a printer is already connected disconnect it and connect again Otherwise the former format becomes valid Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 4 112 System Programming 4 9 Resource Programming 802 System Data Printout Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Starts or stops printing of the system data All the current system programmed data is printed out Start Stop Not applicable 1 Enter 802 Display System Data Dump 2 Press NEXT Display PEINE OUt Start A Press STORE to start printing Printing starts To stop printing in the middle of printing press SELECT and go to step 4 When printing is completed the display shows Display Print Out Finish 4 Press STORE Display Print Out Stop 5 Press END e It is necessary to connect a printer to the EIA RS 232C port provided on the system e You may stop printing by pressing the END button while records are being printed out e You cannot restart the printout while records are being output Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR System Programming 4 113 803 4 9 Resource Programming Music Source Use Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the music source to be used for Music on Hold and Background Music BGM e Hold
219. il Recording SMDR 4 62 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 213 DISA Delayed Answer Time Description Assigns the number of rings between a call received and the answer by the DISA feature Selection Number of rings 0 through 6 Default 1 ring Programming 1 Enter 213 Display DISA Delayed Ans 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 1 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry enter the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e One ring is equivalent to five seconds e You cannot leave the entry empty Feature References Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA Available for KX D1232 only System Programming 4 63 214 4 4 Timer Programming DISA Prolong Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the maximum allowable prolonged time for a DISA CO to CO call A CO to CO call is initially limited by the CO to CO Call Duration Time Program 206 However the DISA caller can prolong the call after hearing the warning tones by pressing any key except the key This parameter the DISA Prolong Time sets the duration of these extended periods Time minutes 0 through 7 O no prolonging 3 min 1 Enter 214 Display DISA Prolng Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 3 min 3 Enter the time To change the current entry enter the new time 4
220. in unit KX TD816 CO 4 CO 3 CO 2 CO I Si rd LI LI To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office KX TD1232 CO8 CO7 CO6 CO5 m C04 I CO3 m CO2 CO1 ES 4 To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office Installation 2 17 2 3 2 CO Line Connection KX TD816 CO1 through CO4 KX TD1232 CO1 through CO8 2 Using Modular Connector for KX TD816C NL NZ KX TD1232BX C Connection KX TD816 KX TD1232 HK ML NL NZ X Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords 4 conductor wiring into the modular jacks on the system R Ring T Tip T2 i RI TI NR View of TEL Jack CO Vi R1 T2 R2 E an CO3 CO4 Seck c01 c02
221. ing Handset Headset Selection Description The system supports the use of headsets on proprietary telephones Conditions e The headset is an option e To set headset mode on a digital proprietary telephone PT use Station Programming To set headset mode on an analog PT use the handset headset selector provided on the set and or on the headset Connection References Please refer to the Operating Instructions for the Headset KX T7090 or KX T30890 Programming References Station Programming ccceccceeceseeeeeeteeeeenteeeeees User Manual Handset Headset Selection Features 3 69 H 3 Features Feature References None Operation References Please refer to the Operating Instructions for the Headset KX T7090 or KX T30890 Handsfree Answerback Description Allows the speakerphone telephone user to talk to a caller without lifting the handset if the user has set handsfree answerback mode If the user receives an intercom call in this mode handsfree conversation is established immediately after the user hears beep tone and the caller hears confirmation tone Conditions e Handsfree answerback mode is set or cancelled by pressing the AUTO ANSWER button e This feature does not work for calls from outside parties or doorphone calls e Handsfree Answerback set on a telephone overrides the Ring Voice Intercom Alerting mode preset on the telephone Handsfree conversation mode is established as soon as confirmati
222. ing a CO call A display example CO 03 Call duration This is shown during an established CO call The display remains for five seconds after the call is finished A display example CO 02 0 02 28 Conditions e Extension numbers and names are programmable If no extension name is stored only the extension number is displayed e The display shows no intercom call duration e The outgoing CO call duration starts when the programmable timer expires Programming References Section 4 System Programming 003 Extension Number Set 004 Extension Name Set 212 Call Duration Count Start Time Feature References Section 3 Features Caller ID Operation References Not applicable 3 52 Features 3 Features D Display Extension Programmed Data Description Conditions Allows the display proprietary telephone user to confirm the features assigned on the buttons on the telephone When it is on hook that is when the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE button is off pressing a button displays the use of the button or the information assigned to the button for five seconds e Display examples 1 If REDIAL SAVE or One Touch Dialing button is pressed the stored number is displayed below 950 1001 PP12345 amp 2 If the DSS or MESSAGE button is pressed the extension number and the name if assigned stored under the DSS button or the source of the Message Waiting is displayed 123 Tony
223. inutes 1 through 64 Default 10 min Programming 1 Enter 206 Display CO CO Dur Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 min 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions You cannot leave the entry empty Feature References Section 3 Features Call Forwarding to CO Line Call Transfer Screened to CO Line Conference Unattended Direct Inward System Access DISA 4 56 System Programming Available for KX TD1232 only 4 4 Timer Programming 207 First Digit Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of CO dial tone and the first digit dialed on an outgoing CO call If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this time the DTMF receiver is released Time seconds 5 through 120 10s 1 Enter 207 Display lst Digit Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e This timer is used for toll restriction checking e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Toll Restriction System Programming 4 57 208 4 4 Timer Programming Inter Digit Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the maximum time allo
224. ion T R Jack 17 CO 10 Extension T R Jack 18 Connections of CO 1 through CO 4 and the respective extensions require no auxiliary connection CO 9 and CO 10 require auxiliary connection to implement this feature Insert the modular plugs of connection cords 4 conductor wiring to the modular jacks of 4 CO Line Unit and 8 Station Line Unit 1 In the case of KX TD816 one 8 Station Line Unit is available T2RITIR2 NN L R Ring T Tip oN View of TEL Jack CO 2 74 Installation 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer Notes In the event of a power failure system memory is protected by the factory provided lithium battery There is no memory loss except the memories of Camp on Saved Number Redial Last Number Redial Call Park and Message Waiting e The system changes the current connection to the above connection automatically when the power supply stops e If DC power is available from backup batteries if AC power fails the system does not change the current connection to the above connection e The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit and the KX TD170 and KX TD180 are illustrated as an expansion units Programming References Section 4 System Programming 109 Expansion Unit Type Feature References Section 3 Features Power Failure Transfer Installation 2 75 2 6
225. ion e Day of the week selection number 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday every day of the week e Hour 1 through 12 Disable no switching e Minute 0 through 59 s AM PM Default Every day of the week Day 9 00 AM Night 5 00 PM Programming 1 Enter 102 Display Day Night Time 2 Press NEXT Display Day of Week gt 3 Enter the day of the week selection number To select Sunday you can also press NEXT Display example Sun Day 9 00 AM To select night mode press NEXT Display example Sun Nig 5 00 PM 4 Enter the hour To set no switching keep pressing SELECT until Disable is displayed and go to step 9 If SELECT is pressed the display shows the previous entry If the previous setting was Disable press SELECT to enter the starting time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 5 Press gt 6 Enter the minute To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new minutes 7 Press gt System Programming 4 33 102 4 3 System Programming Day Night Service Starting Time contd Conditions Feature References 10 11 12 Press SELECT for AM or PM Press STORE To program another day night mode or day of the week press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the day of the week selection number Repeat steps 4 through 10 Press END e To select the
226. ions e Six default messages which are changeable are shown below The means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at individual extension 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext extension number 4 Back at W hour minute 5 Out Until month day 6 In a Meeting e An extension user can select only one message at a time The selected message is displayed every time the user goes off hook Programming References Section 4 System Programming 008 Absent Messages 100 Flexible Numbering Absent message set cancel Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Absent Message Capability Account Code Entry Description An Account Code is used to identify incoming and outgoing CO calls for accounting and billing purposes The account code is appended to the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR call record For incoming CO calls account codes are optional For outgoing CO calls there are three modes available to enter an account code Verified All Calls mode Verified Toll Restriction Override mode and Option mode One mode is selected for each extension on a Class of Service basis In Verified All Calls mode the user must always enter a pre assigned account code when making any of the following calls 3 2 Features 3 Features A Conditions unless it has previously been stored in memory e Call Forwarding to CO Line
227. is no operator or manager press CLEAR at step 3 Section 3 Features Manager Extension Operator System Programming 4 25 007 4 2 Manager Programming DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Assigns the jack numbers for the DSS Console and the paired extension e DSS Console number KX TD816 1 through 4 KX TD1232 1 through 4 for Master 5 through 8 for Slave e Jack number for DSS Console KX TD816 02 through 16 KX TD1232 02 through 32 for Master 33 through 64 for Slave e Jack number for paired extension KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 32 for Master 33 through 64 for Slave All DSS Consoles Not stored L Enter 007 Display DSS Console Asn 2 Press NEXT Display DSS NO gt 3 Enter a DSS Console number To enter DSS Console number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example DSS 1 P 4 Enter a jack number for the console To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new jack number 5 Press gt 6 Enter a jack number for the paired extension To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new jack number Display example DSS 1 02 P 03 7 Press STORE 8 To program another DSS Console press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DSS Console number 4 26 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 007
228. isallows all toll calls Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining pre programmed deny and excepted code tables Denied Code Tables An outgoing CO call made by an extension with a toll restriction level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the selected Denied Code Tables If the leading digits of the dialed number not including the line access code are not found in the table the call is made There are five system programs for Denied Code Tables 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 each program is used to make up a Denied Code Table for Levels 2 through 6 respectively Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited These numbers are defined as denied codes Each table can store up to 20 denied codes each of which consisting of a maximum of seven digits Excepted Code Tables These tables are used to override a programmed denied code A call denied by the selected Denied Code Tables is checked against the selected Excepted Code Tables and if a match is found the call is made There are five system programs for these tables 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 each programming is used to make up an Excepted Code Table for Levels 2 through 6 Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the denied codes These numbers are defined as excepted codes Each table can store up to five excepted codes each of which consisting of a maximum
229. isplay Additionally KX T7235 model telephones are capable of Secret Dialing for Station Speed Dialing numbers e When storing a number press the INTERCOM button at the beginning and the end of the number to be concealed e You can conceal one or more parts of a telephone number e The concealed part will be printed out by SMDR Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual No programming required Section 3 Features One Touch Dialing System Speed Dialing Special Features for KX T7235 Station Speed Dialing DPT Features Secret Dialing Features 3 103 S 3 Features Special Features for KX T7235 The KX T7235 is provided with a large display that allows the user to originate calls or to access system facilities with ease The display prompts the user with information related to the desired feature Examples of this special function are shown below Call Log Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing System Feature Access Menu System Speed Dialing Call Log Description Provides a display of the last dialed telephone numbers and allows the user to perform redialing the number by pressing the associated button Conditions The oldest telephone number will be eliminated when over the limited numbers are dialed out Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Special Display Features for KX T7235 User Manu
230. isplay Pickup Dial Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 1 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions This time gives the user an opportunity to dial digits before the automatic dialing process takes place Feature References Section 3 Features Pickup Dialing 4 54 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time Description Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation with an outside party If a CO call is originated or answered by a programmed extension user and the timer expires the call is disconnected Selection Time minutes 1 through 64 Default 10 min Programming L Enter 205 Display CO Dur Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 min 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e This time out applies to extensions to which Limited Call Duration is assigned by program 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit e This time cannot be set to zero or be left empty Feature References Section 3 Features Limited Call Duration System Programming 4 55 206 4 4 Timer Programming CO to CO Call Duration Time Description Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation between two outside parties When the timer expires the CO to CO call is disconnected Selection Time m
231. itional Information Field 13 Feature References Section 3 Features Conference Operation References DPT Features User Manual Executive Busy Override CO Line Executive Busy Override Extension Description Allows the pre assigned extension user to barge into an existing extension call either between two inside parties or between an outside and an inside party so as to establish a three party conference call It is possible for extension users to prevent this function from being executed by another extension user Executive Busy Override Deny Conditions e Class of Service programming determines the extension users who can perform Executive Busy Override and Executive Busy Override Deny e This feature does not work if the extension has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security e When a two party call is changed to a three party call and vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties This tone can be eliminated by System Programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Executive busy override deny set cancel 505 Executive Busy Override 506 Executive Busy Override Deny 990 System Additional Information Field 13 3 62 Features 3 Features E Feature References Operation References User Manual Extension Group Description Conditions Section 3 Features Conference DPT Features SLT Features Executive Busy Override
232. its max All locations Not stored 1 Enter a program address 301 through 305 Display example TRS Deny LVL 2 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a toll call number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 20 toll call numbers which can be restricted for each program Each number has a maximum of seven digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character XS can be used as a wild card character e Programs 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 are used to assign exceptions to these numbers Programs 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night are used to set the toll restriction value for each COS Section 3 Features Toll Restriction System Programming 4 67 306 310 4 5 TRS ARS Programming TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 Description These allow you to assign numbers which are exceptions to the toll restriction specified in programs 301 through 305 as follows Program 306 applies to level 2 Program 307 applies to levels 2 through 3 Program 308 applies to leve
233. its max Default All locations Not stored Programming L Enter 311 Display Special Carrier 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a special carrier number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions There is a maximum of 20 special carrier numbers Each carrier number has a maximum of seven digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character can be used as a wild card character Feature References Section 3 Features Pause Insertion Automatic Toll Restriction for Special Carrier Access System Programming 4 69 312 4 5 TRS ARS Programming ARS Mode Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Allows you to turn on or off the Automatic Route Selection ARS mode ARS if enabled selects the least expensive route to be used for a CO call On Off Off 1 Enter 312 Display ARS Mode 2 Press NEXT Display example ARS Off 3 Press SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END es If Off is selected the Automatic Line Access feature func
234. jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e The eXtra Device Port feature must be assigned Disable for DSS ports e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e To assign all jacks to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 e Immediately after changing your assignment the changed setting may not work for a maximum of eight seconds Section 3 Features EXtra Device Port XDP System Programming 4 101 601 4 8 Extension Programming Class of Service Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Programs each extension for a Class of Service COS The COS determines the call handling abilities of each extension e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e COS number 1 through 8 All jacks 1 2 COS 1 1 Enter 601 Display COS Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select
235. jacks on the unit Jack for Power Failure Transfer TI R1 T2 R2 CO 9 CO10 3 C011 CO12 T2R1 T1 R2 NAY R Ring T Tip View of TEL Jack CO D Gees To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office t For details refer to Section 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer Installation 2 57 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 E If KX TD170 is to be installed for KX TD1232 Insert the connector into the jack Jack for Power Failure Transfer Connector type 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or the equivalent a Mag Wi ie To extensions Jacks 17 24 or 25 32 Notes For Cable Pin Numbers to Be Connected see page 2 18 e For fixing the connector see page 2 48 t For details refer to Section 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer 2 58 Installation 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 7 Tie up all the cords into a bundle If Notes If two or three expansion units are other cords are coming from the upper installed cut the cabinet cover s on the cabinets tie them too lower cabinet s to let the cords from 8 Close the cabinet cover and secure the uppe
236. k You must select a line to answer 2 Prime Line Preference You can assign a prime line beforehand and answer a call on that line when multiple calls are received simultaneously 3 Ringing Line Preference When you go off hook you answer the call ringing at your telephone Features 3 79 L 3 Features Conditions e Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting e If Prime Line Preference is selected and an incoming call arrives from a line other than the prime line it cannot be answered just by going off hook The Prime Line should be assigned to the Single CO button e If Ringing Line Preference is selected going off hook does not answer a line programmed for no ring even though there is an incoming call Going off hook during the delay time does not answer a line programmed for delayed ringing e A single line telephone is always set to Ringing Line Preference and cannot be changed Programming References Station Programming 0 cccecceecceseeereeeteeeecnteeeeeees User Manual Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Feature References None Operation References Basic Operation User Manual Receiving Calls Line Preference Outgoing Idle Line No Line Prime Line Description A proprietary telephone user can select a desired outgoing line preference to originate calls from the following three line preferences 1 Idle Line Preference When you go off hook you are
237. l If you use the Clip Terminal KX A205 to connect eight extensions connect a cable shown below to the clip terminal as follows Refer to Connection Chart on the following page Clip no Connector type Pin no ES KX A205 Clip Terminal 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or the equivalent 25 1 50 26 40 40 39 39 38 38 37 37 36 36 olan KR 35 35 s 34 34 REMOTE 33 33 ram CH H 32 32 hl A 31 z a gece P nm m a F 29 29 be 9 28 28 F z S 27 27 26 26 ES 25 25 g H e Ss 24 24 S e 23 23 e KM 2 BB DEA Ea o 21 21 H H gt Sie i a If IN OUT JOORPHONE aj OO O 0 IN OUT
238. l 74 48 Absent message set cancel 750 49 __ Timed reminder set cancel confirm 76 50 Electronic station lockout set cancel 77 51 Night service mode set cancel 78 52 Parallel telephone mode set cancel 39 53 Background music external on off 35 CD 42 Ror KX TD1232X and KX TD816NL 1232NL these defaults are interchanged e Operator Call 9 e Automatic line access ARS 0 Available for KX TD1232 only System Programming 4 3 101 4 3 System Programming Day Night Service Switching Mode Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References This program is used to determine if night mode is automatic or manual Manual Auto automatic Manual 1 4 5 Enter 101 Display Day Night Mode Press NEXT Display example D N Mode Manual Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END e If automatic switching is assigned day night mode is switched at the time programmed in 102 Day Night Service Starting Time e Operator 1 can switch the day night mode at any time Section 3 Features Night Service 4 32 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 102 Day Night Service Starting Time Description Sets the starting time on a day of the week basis when automatic day night switching is programmed in program 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode Select
239. l CO lines e 10 pps 20 pps All CO lines 10 pps 1 Enter 403 Display Pulse Speed 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 10pps 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the X key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 e The pulse speed required is determined by the CO or PBX line e Program 990 System Additional Information Field 17 and Field 21 are used to select a pulse break ratio and inter digit pause if needed Section 3 Features Dial Type Selection 4 80 System Programming 4 5 CO Line Programming 404 DTMF Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References A CO line set to DTMF mode in program 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two settings This program sets the duration of the DTMF signals sent to a CO line to DTMF mode e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e
240. l Printer Serial Interface 25 pin RS 232C Notes The KX TD12372 is illustrated as a main unit Cables must be shielded and the maximum length is 2 m 6 5 feet Make cables so that the printer will be connected to the system as shown in the chart on the following page The pin configuration of EIA RS 232C Connector is as follows r Circuit Type Pin Signal Name No EIA CCITT 1 FG Frame Ground AA 101 2 SD TXD Transmitted Data BA 103 3 RD RXD Received Data BB 104 4 RS RTS Request To Send CA 105 5 CS CTS Clear To Send CB 106 6 DR DSR Data Set Ready CC 107 7 SG Signal Ground AB 102 8 CD DCD Data Carrier Detect CF 109 20 ER DTR Data Terminal CD 108 2 Ready 2 38 Installation 2 3 10 Printer Connection Connection Chart for Printer Personal Computer 25 pin If you connect a PC or the printer with 25 pin EIA RS 232C connector to your system see the chart below EIA RS 232C port on EIA RS 232C port on the printer PC 25 pin the main unit 25 pin is Signal Pin Pin Signal SE EIA Name No No Name EIA AA FG 1 1 FG AA BA SD TXD Ce 3 RD RXD BB BB RD RXD 3 2 SD TXD BA CB CS CTS 5 m r CC DR DSR 6 m 20 ER DTR CD AB SG H H SG AB CD ER DTR 20 m5 CS CTS CB 6 DR DSR CC 8 CD DCD CF Connection Chart for Printer IBM Personal Comput
241. l except DISA call or a doorphone call comes in or when an extension caller executes Busy Station Signaling e Setting Data Line Security temporarily cancels Call Waiting which has been turned on by an extension user e For proprietary telephone users two types of call waiting tone are provided to prevent them from missing the tone as shown below A proprietary telephone user can select the desired type by Station Programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call waiting set cancel Station Programming ccceccceecceseeereeeneeeeeeteeeeees User Manual Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 35 C Feature References Operation References User Manual Caller ID Description Conditions Connection References 3 Features Section 3 Features Busy Station Signaling BSS DPT Features SLT Features Call Waiting Provides the display proprietary telephone user with a caller s information such as his her name and telephone number on the CO line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls e Up to 500 Caller ID entry numbers can be stored in the table called Caller ID Table in the system Each entry can consist a caller s telephone number and name e It is required to assign the CO lines which Caller ID Service is offered by a Central Office e When receiving a CO call with Caller ID the display
242. lanation for Areas 1 and 2 Field Description Selection Default References 1 Sound source during transfer 0 ringback tone 1 e CALL 1 Music on Hold TRANSFER FEATURES e Music on Hold 2 Result of pressing the hookswitch lightly 0 Consultation 0 Consultation and then placing down the handset during a Hold Hold CO line call single line telephones only 1 disconnection 3 Result of pressing the FLASH button on 0 disconnection for KX TD e External proprietary telephones during a CO line signal ores 1232 Feature Access call 1 External ofore e Flash Feature Access others 4 Enables or disables the dial tone between 0 disable 1 None obtaining a CO line and dialing the phone 1 enable number when using the one touch dial redial or speed dial function 5 Result of pressing the hookswitch lightly 0 Consultation 0 Consultation single line telephones only Hold Hold 1 disconnection 6 Sets the duration of the DTMF signals sent 0 80 ms 0 Voice Mail to the Voice Processing System VPS ports 1 160 ms Integration 7 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals such as a mailbox 01 1 0s Integration number to VPS after VPS answers a call 10 1 5s 11 2 0s 8 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals programmed in 01 1 0s Integration 113 to VPS after the VPS calls an 10 1 5s extension
243. lay COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Option 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 105 Account Codes is used to define the Account Codes for the Verified modes e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Feature References Section 3 Features Account Code Entry Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry 4 100 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 600 EXtra Device Port Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References EXtra Device Port XDP allows a single line telephone SLT to be connected to the same jack as a digital proprietary telephone DPT This program assigns which jacks are XDP The SLT and DPT of the programmed jack work as independent extensions e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 all jacks KX TD1232 01 through 64 x all jacks e Disable Enable All jacks Disable 1 Enter 600 Display XDP Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter
244. le Field 1 All COS 0000 Field 2 All COS 1 1 Enter 991 Display COS Add Inf 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number Display example 1111111111110000 4 Keep pressing lt or gt to move the cursor to the desired field System Programming 4 131 991 4 10 Option Programming COS Additional Information conta 5 Enter your selection 0 or 1 To change the current entry press STORE and the new selection 6 To program another field repeat steps 4 and 5 7 Press STORE 8 To program another COS press SELECT and the desired COS number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END Conditions None Feature References Section 3 Features Call Forwarding Follow Me Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Class of Service COS 4 132 System Programming 4 10 Option Programming 992 CO Line Group Additional Information Description This program is provided for the future use Programming procedures only are shown here Selection CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 all CO line groups Default Not applicable Programming 1 Enter 992 Display TRG Add Inf 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter a CO line group number Display example 1111111111111111 4 Keep pressing lt or gt to move the cursor to the desired field 5 Enter your selection 0 or 1 To change the current entry press STORE and the new selection
245. lection e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 all CO lines KX TD 1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Regular no detection Reverse detection Default Regular Programming 1 Enter 416 Display Reverse Circuit 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Regular 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COU Feature References Section 3 Features Reverse Circuit 4 92 System Programming Available for KX TD816BX and KX TD1232DBX DxX 4 7 COS Programming 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Each extension must be assigned a Class of Service COS These programs set the toll restriction value for each COS in day or night mode e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS e Level number 1 through 8 All COS Level 1 Day Night 1 Enter a program address 500 for day or 501 for night Display example TRS Level Day 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Ent
246. lephone can be assigned as a DSS button using either System or Station Programming DSS buttons are provided on DSS Consoles with default setting Changing the setting is possible from the paired telephone using Station Programming e Once a button is assigned as a DSS button it provides Busy Lamp Field BLF status e The mode of a DSS button on a DSS Console proprietary telephone can be programmed to disconnect the CO line and calls the extension or hold and transfer the call to the extension One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 108 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Station Programming 0cccccceecceseeereeeteeeeeeteeeeeens User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Direct Station Selection DSS Button Section 3 Features Busy Lamp Field One Touch Transfer by DSS DSS Console KX T7240 Button KX T7040 Basic Operation Making Calls Digital DSS Console Features DSS Direct Station Selection Buttons 3 14 Features 3 Button Flexible Description Conditions Features B The use of Flexible Buttons is determined by either System or Station Programming The following three types of Flexible Buttons are provided on proprietary telephones PT and DSS Consoles e Flexible CO buttons provided on PT only e Flexible DSS buttons provi
247. ll Forwarding etc Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 5 DISA Card Installation 2 4 6 Remote Card Installation Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks 813 Floating Number Assignment Feature References None Operation References Not applicable 3 68 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features F H Full One Touch Dialing Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to make a call or have access to a system service with one button There is no need to turn the SP PHONE MONITOR button on before pressing the button which is required for One Touch Dialing Handsfree operation is automatically provided by pressing a One Touch Dialing button a DSS button a REDIAL button or a SAVE button Conditions e It is necessary to program automatic handsfree dial mode e This feature is also available with DSS buttons on a DSS Console e This feature is also available with the large display operation of KX T7235 Special Features for KX T7235 Programming References Station Programming cceecceecceseeeeeeeneeeeenteeeeees User Manual Full One Touch Dialing Assignment Feature References Section 3 Features Button Direct Station Redial Last Number Selection DSS Redial Saved Number One Touch Dialing Special Features for KX T7235 Operation References DPT Features User Manual Full One Touch Dial
248. llows the user to determine which lines are idle and which lines are in use The table below shows the lighting patterns and line conditions according to the CO button type LED Indicator CO Line Status Off Idle Green On I use Green slow flash I hold Green moderate flash I Exclusive Hold CO to CO call Unattended Conference Green rapid flash Hold Recall Privacy Release possible Incoming call Red On Other use Red slow flash Other hold Flashing light winks patterns Moderate flash Rapid flash Koch n 3 74 Features 3 Features L Conditions e Red slow flash indication appears on the S CO button only e The indication of Privacy Release appears on the S CO button only Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming 0cccccceecceseerceeeeeetecnteeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Loop CO L CO Button Single CO S CO Button Feature References Section 3 Features Button Group CO G CO Button Single CO S CO Button Loop CO L CO Operation References Not applicable LED Indication Intercom Description The LED Light Emitting Diode indicator of the INTERCOM button indicates the line condition with a variety of lighting patterns This allows the
249. lly called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb functions if any e A Floating Station cannot be programmed as the forwarded destination Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding Do not disturb set cancel Station Programming cccecceecceseeeeeeteeeeeeteenaeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Description Conditions A call directed to your extension is forwarded to another extension if your telephone is busy e Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are CO calls DIL 1 1 DISA Intercept Routing Intercom calls Extension Transfer e There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding if a call is forwarded to a station which is also in Call Forwarding In this case Station Hunting is activated for the forwarded call e Although calls are forwarded Message Waiting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also
250. ls 2 through 4 Program 309 applies to levels 2 through 5 Program 310 applies to levels 2 through 6 Selection e Location number 1 through 5 e Exceptional number 7 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter a program address 306 through 310 Display example TRS Excp LVL 2 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 Not Stored 4 Enter an exceptional number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions There is a maximum of five numbers for each program Each number has a maximum of seven digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character X can be used as a wild card character Notice Store your emergency numbers in program 310 Feature References Section 3 Features Toll Restriction 4 68 System Programming 4 5 TRS ARS Programming 311 Special Carrier Access Codes Description Assigns special carrier numbers This allows the system to recognize the user dialed special carrier number in order to insert the necessary pause and to apply toll restriction Selection e Location number 01 through 20 e Special carrier number 7 dig
251. ls only Example of Toll Restriction programming Here is an example to explain the procedures for Toll Restriction programming 1 Determining the application Determine the dialing numbers that should be denied for levels 2 through 6 Levels 1 7 and 8 are fixed and do not require programming Features 3 121 T 3 Features Entry Example Level Denied Code Excepted Code 2 011 None 3 011 None 976 1xxx976 4 011 None 976 1xxx976 0 5 011 None 976 1xxx976 0 411 1xxx555 6 O11 911 976 1911 1xxx976 800 0 1800 411 1xxx555 1 x0 x1 Note x substitutes a digit 2 Programming 1 500 501 Toll Restriction Assignment Assign a toll restriction level to each Class of Service COS Example COS Level Day Level Night 1 1 6 2 6 8 8 8 3 122 Features 3 Features T 2 301 305 Denied Code Table Entry Depending on the application enter the denied codes in the associated tables You can use numeric characters and the wild card character x Level 2 Denied Code Table Level 3 Denied Code Table Level 4 Denied Code Table Location Code Location Code Location Code 01 001 01 976 01 0 02 1 976 20 20 20 Level 5 Denied Code Table Level 6 Denied Code Table Location Code Location Code 01 411 01 1 02 1 555 02 x0 03 EI 20 20
252. lt Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns names to the system speed dial numbers assigned in program 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set The large display telephone KX T7235 shows the stored name when performing System Speed Dialing e Speed dial number 00 through 99 e Name 10 characters max All speed dial numbers Not stored 1 Enter 002 Display SPD Name Set 2 Press NEXT Display SPD Code gt 3 Enter a speed dial number To enter speed dial number 00 you can also press NEXT Display example 00 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To program another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e Speed dial numbers are programmed in program 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set e There is a maximum of 100 names Each name has a maximum of 10 characters e To go to another speed dial number at steps 3 through 6 press SELECT and start with step 3 Section 3 Features Special Features for KX T7235 System Speed Dialing 4 18 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 003 Extension Number Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Assigns an extension numbe
253. mentioned telephone sets to either of the following e Jack number 1 e Jack programmed as a manager extension To assign the manager extension see Section 4 2 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment 4 2 System Programming 4 1 1 Using the Proprietary Telephone Soft Buttons and SHIFT Button on the Display DPT Three soft buttons are provided just below the display on the display Digital Proprietary Telephones DPT The functions of these soft buttons vary as the programming procedures advance from step to step Those functions that are currently assigned to the buttons are shown on the lower line of the display See Viewing the Display on page 4 6 for more information on the display lines If the SHIFT button indicator is on two functions are available with each soft button To alternate between the two functions press the SHIFT button on the right side of the display Soft button variations Type 1 Example Buttons i i l i Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT Type 2 Press SHIFT ESCHER __ Cdternate REGER PREV Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT Type 3 Press SHIFT gt SEL Mr Dam lt SEL PREV Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT System Programming 4 3 4 1 1 Using the Proprietary Telephone Type 4 Press SHIFT
254. mmed extension user is disconnected when the time specified in program 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time expires e Extensions in the limited classes cannot establish a CO to CO call that is cannot transfer forward a CO call to another CO line or perform an Unattended Conference e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension e Program 990 System Additional Information Field 12 is used to program Limited Call Duration to be done for outgoing calls only Section 3 Features Call Forwarding to CO Line Conference Unattended Call Transfer Screened to CO Line Limited Call Duration 4 94 System Programming 4 7 COS Programming 503 Call Transfer to CO Line Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References This program determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform the Call Transfer to CO Line function e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS e Enable Disable All COS Enable 1 Enter 503 Display Transfer to CO 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE
255. n 2 3 6 EXtra Device Port XDP Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 600 EXtra Device Port 3 64 Features 3 Features F Feature References Operation References Flash Description Conditions Section 3 Features Paralleled Telephone Not applicable The FLASH button is used to allow a proprietary telephone user to disconnect from the current call and originate another call without hanging up first e If External Feature Access is enabled by System Programming this function does not work for a CO call e Pressing the FLASH button re starts the conversation duration outputs an SMDR record inserts the automatic pause and checks toll restriction level again e It is required to enable this function at the locked extension and toll restricted extension by System Programming Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 414 Disconnect Time 990 System Additional Information Fields 3 15 Section 3 Features External Feature Access Operation References DPT Features User Manual Flash Flexible Numbering Description The numbers used for the access codes of system features and the number used for extension numbers are not fixed They can be set as required provided there are not any conflicts Feature numbers can be from one to three digits utilizing numbers 0 through 9 as well as and Extension numbers can be
256. n enter 0 through 9 and for the characters If the user enters digits less than the number of characters it is recommended to fill the remaining characters with or X If there are 4 digit extension numbers available in your system add one to Message 3 To display parts of the message which have scrolled off the display press gt or lt Section 3 Features Absent Message Capability 4 28 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Description Selection Default Programming Assigns the leading digits of extension numbers and feature numbers for system features e Selection number 01 through 53 See Feature Number List on page 4 31 for the corresponding features e Feature number 1 or 2 digits for selection numbers 01 through 16 1 through 3 digits for selection numbers 17 through 53 See Feature Number List on page 4 31 1 Enter 100 Display FLX Numbering 2 Press NEXT Display Select NO gt 3 Enter a selection number To enter selection number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 1 EXT BL 1 4 Enter the feature number To delete the feature number press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another selection press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired selection number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press EN
257. n tone is sent from external pagers before the voice announcement Eliminating the tone is programmable e The ringing or busy extension cannot receive a page Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 8 External Pager Paging Equipment Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Paging external Paging external answer TAFAS answer Paging group Paging group answer 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Paging All Paging ANSWER Paging and Transfer Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 91 P Paging External Description Conditions Connection References 3 Features Allows you to make a voice announcement using external paging devices external pagers One pager for KX TD816 and up to two pagers per system for KX TD1232 can be contained For KX TD1232 it is possible to select one or two pagers to perform your paging Any telephone user can answer your Paging External e Previous connection of an external pager is required e External pagers can be used for TAFAS Paging External or Background Music BGM External in this order For example if Paging External is overridden by TAFAS reorder tone is returned to the performer of the Paging External If BGM is overridd
258. n tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by the feature number Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Call Park Description Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call hold retrieve intercom 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Section 3 Features Call Hold Intercom DPT Features SLT Features Call Hold Retrieve Allows the extension user to place a held call into a system parking area This releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations The parked call can be retrieved by any other extension user Features 3 29 C 3 Features Conditions e The system contains 10 parking areas each of which has its own call park number Up to 10 calls can be parked at the same time in the system Under the System Connection all users may access the same call parking area The number of holding slots remains at 10 e If a parked call is not retrieved in a specific period of time Transfer Recall starts e Ifa parked call is not retrieved in 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected e Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the parked call is retrieved Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call park call park retrieve 201 Transfer Recall Time 990 System Additional Information Field 16
259. nable 504 Call Forwarding to CO Line All COS Disable 505 Executive Busy Override All COS Disable 506 Executive Busy Override Deny All COS Enable 507 Do Not Disturb Override All COS Disable 508 Account Code Entry Mode All COS Option Extension Programming 600 EXtra Device Port All Jacks Disable 5 6 List Available for KX TD816BX and KX TD1232DBX DxX only 5 2 Default Values Address Program Default 601 Class of Service All Jacks 1 2 COS 1 602 Extension Group Assignment 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night All Jacks 1 2 Extension Group 1 All Jacks 1 2 All CO Lines Immediate Ringing Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night All Jacks 1 2 All CO Lines Enable Day Night 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Jack 01 1 All Doorphones Other Jacks No Day Night Doorphone Day Night 609 Voice Mail Access Codes Not Stored Resource Programming 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Outgoing Calls All Incoming Calls On Printout 801 SMDR Format Page Length 66 Skip Perforation 0 802 System Data Printout Not Applicable 803 Music Source Use Hold and BGM Music 1 804 External Pager BGM All External Pagers Disable 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone On 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters New Line Code CR LF Baud Rate 9600 Word Length 8 Parity Bit Mark Stop Bit 1 Port1 Port2
260. nager Programming System Speed Dialing Number Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Used to program the System Speed Dial numbers These numbers are available to all extension users There are 100 numbers from 00 through 99 e Speed dial number 00 through 99 e Telephone number 24 digits max All speed dial numbers Not stored 1 Enter 001 Display SPD Number Set 2 Press NEXT Display SPD Code gt 3 Enter a speed dial number To enter speed dial number 00 you can also press NEXT Display example 00 Not Stored 4 Enter a telephone number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 100 speed dial numbers Each speed dial number has a maximum of 24 digits The valid characters are 0 through 9 and keys FLASH PAUSE SECRET and hyphen buttons To store the flash signal press FLASH Note The stored flash will be in effect only during an established call Refer to Section 3 External Feature Access To store a hyphen press the cr 9 button 4 16 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set conta To store a pause press PAUSE Refer
261. nager Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the jack number for a manager and or operators The manager extension can perform System Programming Operator 1 has the ability to perform operator services e OPE 1 operator 1 OPE 2 operator 2 MNGER manager e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD 1232 01 through 64 Operator 1 Jack 01 Operator 2 and Manager Not stored 1 Enter 006 Display Operator Manager 2 Press NEXT to program operator 1 Display OPE 1 Jack0l To program another item you can also keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired one is displayed 3 Enter a jack number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new jack number 4 Press STORE 5 To program another item press NEXT or PREV 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END e Up to two operators and a manager can be programmed e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e The manager cannot be assigned the jack number of the DSS Console Port set in program 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment e If the assigned jack is in eXtra Device Port mode the proprietary telephone jack is treated as the manager operator extension e If there
262. nal and internal cables and the earth wire to the building Then install the arrester and mount the cover on the protector 2 44 Installation 2 4 Installation of Optional Cards and Units 2 4 1 Location of Optional Cards and Units The location of the optional cards is shown below Precaution To protect the printed circuit boards P boards from static electricity do not touch parts on the P boards in the main unit and on the optional cards Expansion Units KX TWP816 One 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 and or one 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 can be installed to any of the two expansion areas Zz 8 Station Cl Em mam f Line Unit If KX TD170 srt ah ce w Adds eight area 2 ER A ul E o n Cee e Lu extensions e E BP 4 CO Line Expansion 4 Unit KX e JE lt G IE areal UN f _ TD180 IR ai ii o Adds four 3 ee E CO lines Expansion Unit Connectors a Remove the cover plate s on the front cover Note System Programming is required for expansion unit location Refer to Section 4 3 109 Expansion Unit Type Default Area
263. nating a CO call Call The corresponding CO Program the CO button See Transfer or Conference button does not exist on the Section 4 2 005 Flexible CO cannot be performed proprietary telephone Button Assignment 6 1 4 Using Reset Button If the system does not operate properly use the Reset Button If Master and Slave Systems are in operation by System Connection for KX TD1232 reset both systems Before using the Reset Button try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not Notes a When the System Clear Switch is set to NORMAL pressing the Reset Button causes the following 1 Camp on is cleared 2 Calls on Hold are terminated 3 Calls on Exclusive Hold are terminated 4 Calls in progress are terminated 5 Call Park is cleared Other data stored in memory except the above are not cleared b When the System Clear Switch is set to the CLEAR position you must press the Reset Button with caution because all data stored in memory will be cleared by the following operation pressing the Reset Button and setting the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL position while the Power Indicator is flashing Troubleshooting 6 5 6 1 Troubleshooting Operation A If the system does not operate properly 1 Make sure that the System Clear Switch is set to the NORMAL position 2 Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool B If the system still
264. ndication CO Line Ringing Tone Selection for CO Line Access CO Line Group Buttons DPT Features Answering Direct CO Line Outward Dialing Line Access CO Line Group Button Loop CO L CO Description Conditions All CO lines can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a proprietary telephone PT The assigned button serves as a Loop CO L CO button An incoming call on any CO line arrives at the L CO unless there are S CO or G CO buttons associated with the line or unless the button is already in use To make a CO call the PT user can simply press the dedicated L CO button e No L CO button is originally provided on a PT A flexible CO button can be assigned as an L CO button in either System or Station Programming It is possible to assign more than one L CO button on a PT Pressing the L CO button provides the same operation as dialing the automatic line access code This results in Automatic Line Access or Automatic Route Selection ARS if programmed Immediate delayed no ringing or no incoming call disable can be selected on an extension CO line basis The digital PT user can choose a desired ringer frequency for each L CO button by System or Station Programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignm
265. nditions This feature provides a display of the system features available at any time and allows the user to have access to the desired features e The features available to access are Absent Message Capability Call Pickup Group Call Forwarding set cancel Do Not Disturb set cancel Message Waiting Paging access answer Paralleled Telephone e In addition to the features above the Operator 1 can have the display of the following features Background Music BGM External Call Park Night Service Outgoing Message Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 105 S 3 Features Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual No programming required None Special Display Features for KX T7235 System Feature Access Menu System Speed Dialing Description Conditions A list of the names stored for System Speed Dialing is displayed This allows the user to dial by name without having to know the telephone number All the user needs to do is to press the button associated with the desired name e The numbers and names for System Speed Dialing must be programmed e Ifa name is not stored for a number it is not displayed and cannot be called with this feature Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set Section 3
266. nditions e Assigning Data Line Security always offers conversation privacy unless Privacy Release is executed e If one extension in a conversation has set Data Line Security it applies to the both extensions Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Data line security set cancel Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Data Line Security Dial Tone Distinctive Description Four types of dial tone patterns are available to give some information about features enabled on the telephone set Dial tone 1 Normal dial tone None of the features listed below are enabled D ls D lt 1 l Li l Dial tone 2 Sounds when any one of the features below are set Absent Message Capability Background Music BGM for proprietary telephones only Call Forwarding Call Pickup Deny Call Waiting Data Line Security Features 3 45 Conditions Programming References Feature References 3 Features Do Not Disturb DND Electronic Station Lockout Executive Busy Override Deny Pickup Dialing Timed Reminder Dial tone 3 Sounds when performing Account Code Entry Also sounds when answering Timed Reminder call ls i q i 1 1 1 Dial tone 4 Sounds when messages are waiting for the extension 1 ls None No programming required None Operation References Not applicable Dial Type Selec
267. ne CO or intercom call can be held e If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Hold Recall results e Music is sent to the party on hold if available Music on Hold Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call hold 200 Hold Recall Time Section 3 Features Call Park Music on Hold Hold Recall DPT Features SLT Features Call Hold Call Hold Exclusive CO Line Description Conditions Allows the proprietary telephone user to prevent any other extension users from retrieving a held CO call Only the user who held it can retrieve the call e If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Hold Recall results After Hold Recall results the held call can be retrieved from any other extension Features 3 27 C 3 Features If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected e Music is sent to the party on hold if available Music on Hold Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 200 Hold Recall Time Section 3 Features Hold Recall Music on Hold DPT Features Call Hold Exclusive Call Hold Exclusive Intercom Description Conditions Allows the proprietary telephone user to prevent any other extension users from retr
268. ne access ARS 103 Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment 211 Dial Start Time 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Feature References Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Outward Dialing Line Access Automatic Line Access CO Line Group Description Allows the extension user to dial access a CO line group An idle line is selected from the CO line group To specify a CO line group dial the feature number the default setting is 8 anda desired CO line group number 1 through 8 A proprietary telephone user can also specify a CO line group by pressing a Group CO button Conditions e Each extension is subject to System Programming items for CO lines available to access e An idle line is selected in sequence from the lines in the specified CO line group e Group CO buttons must be programmed prior to use e If Idle Line Preference Outgoing is set on the telephone the user can access an idle line only by going off hook Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering CO line group line access 211 Dial Start Time Features 3 77 L 3 Features 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 401 CO Line Group Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station
269. nected unless the caller re tries or prolongs the time if available Warning tone is generated to both parties 15 seconds before the time limit at five second intervals Prolonging the call duration can be allowed from one to seven minutes or disallowed The caller can attempt this several times to prolong it further To detect the end of a CO CO call CPC Signal Detection and Tone Detection can be assigned Features 3 49 D Connection References 3 Features Section 2 Installation 2 4 5 DISA Card Installation 2 4 6 Remote Card Installation Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming To enable DISA feature 100 Flexible Numbering Outgoing message recording playing 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set 809 DISA Security Type 810 DISA Tone Detection 811 DISA User Codes 812 DISA DTMF Repeat To set DISA timer values 206 CO to CO Call Duration Time 213 DISA Delayed Answer Time 214 DISA Prolong Time 215 Outgoing Message Time To enable the Intercept Routing feature 203 Intercept Time 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night KS kel kel kel Section 3 Features Intercept Routing Outgoing Message OGM DPT Features SLT Features Direct Inward System Access DISA 3 50 Features 3 Features Flow chart of possible
270. ng instructions suppose that you have already entered programming mode and that you will use Method 2 Confirming the entries You may review the stored programming without making any changes Going back to the operation mode Two ways are available to go back to the operation mode 1 Lift the handset while in programming mode 2 When the Initial Message SYS PGM NO gt is displayed press the PROGRAM or PAUSE button To display the Initial Message press END 4 8 System Programming 4 1 3 Entering Characters You can enter characters to store names for speed dial numbers extension numbers etc by using the dialing key pad and the buttons Each of twelve dialing keys on the dialing key pad has seven characters assigned See the Combination Tables below Pressing SELECT Times B als a S H vu zi a l S oO Leen jlx AER s el ll xR oes i y aa S S oli Z A DI DI Ki lt i n OP Re ma lt K CO OC oo rp alu A all Combination Table 2 Note for KX TD816C KX TD1232C users The alphabetical characters correspond to the letters shown on the twelve dialing keys on the proprietary telephone except Q q Z z and other symbols Combination Table 1 Press SHIFT to alternate between capital and small letters System Programming 4 9 4 1 3 Entering Characters
271. ngle CO S CO Operation References DPT Features User Manual Outward Dialing Line Access Automatic Line Access CO Line Group Line Access Individual 3 78 Features 3 Features L Line Access Individual Description Allows the proprietary telephone user one button access to a CO line without having to dial a line access code Conditions e Each extension is subject to System Programming items for CO lines available to access e This feature requires a Single CO S CO button assignment on a proprietary telephone e The system waits for a programmed time before dialing after a CO line is seized Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 211 Dial Start Time 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming eeseseeeeeees seese ee es seeres ses sesrsseese User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Single CO S CO Button Feature References Section 3 Features Button Single CO S CO CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Operation References DPT Features User Manual Outward Dialing Line Access Individual Line Preference Incoming No Line Prime Line Ringing Line Description A proprietary telephone user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences 1 No Line Preference No line is selected when you go off hoo
272. nk CO Line Answer From Any Station Available for KX TD1232 only Installation 2 35 2 3 9 External Music Source Connection KX TD816 One music source such as a radio user supplied can be connected to KX TD816 as illustrated below Insert the plug to the earphone headphone jack on the external music source External Music Jack Use a two conductor plug 3 5 mm 9 64 inch in diameter e Input impedance 8 Q Maximum length of the cable AWG 18 22 Under 10 m 33 feet or Ef Panasonic External Music Source KX TD1232 Up to two music sources such as a radio user supplied can be connected to KX TD1232 per system as illustrated below Insert the plug to the earphone headphone jack on the external music source Use a two conductor plug 3 5 mm 9 64 inch in diameter e Input impedance 8 Q Maximum length of the cable External Music Jack 2 AWG 18 22 Under 10 m 33 feet External Music Jack 1 or Le External Music Source 1 2 36 Installation 2 3 9 External Music Source Connection Notes e System Programming of music source
273. ns In this case a line access code should not be stored on the second button e If the Full One Touch Dialing is enabled there is no need to go off hook before pressing the One Touch Button Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming 0 cccccceecceseeeeeeteeeeenteeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment One Touch Dialing Button Full One Touch Dialing Assignment DSS Console Features User Manual PF Programmable Feature Buttons One Touch Dialing Section 3 Features Full One Touch Dialing Features 3 87 O 3 Features Operation References DPT Features User Manual One Touch Dialing DSS Console Features One Touch Dialing One Touch Access for System Features One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Description Conditions This feature if programmed allows the DSS Console and the proprietary telephone user to hold a CO call and quickly transfer it to an extension While talking to an outside party pressing a DSS button on the console or the proprietary telephone provides automatic hold and transfer There is no need to press the TRANSFER button The extension starts ringing immediately e One Touch Transfer cannot be performed when there is another call on Consultation Hold e If One Touch Transfer mode is disabled the user transfers a CO call by pressing the TRANSFER button followed by
274. nsfers a call to an extension and then it is forwarded to an AA port so that the AA port can be switched to VM port temporarily e Other programming required program addresses 106 602 4 46 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 14 VM Command DTMF Set contd Selection e LV MSG GETMSG AA SVC VM SVC e DTMF signal number 16 digits max Default LV MSG H GETMSG SH AA SVC 8 VM SVC 6 Programming L Enter 114 Display VM Command Set 2 Press NEXT to program the LV MSG command To program another command keep pressing NEXT until the desired command is displayed Display example LV MSG H 3 Enter a DTMF signal number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 4 Press STORE 5 To program another selection keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired selection is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END Conditions e A command signal number can have a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 FLASH and PAUSE e The FLASH button is available only for LV MSG and GETMSG commands to store H which means Home Position e If H is stored for LV MSG a mailbox number programmed in program 609 Voice Mail Access Codes or an extension number will be sent to the VM port Follow On ID function If certain codes are required before and after the ID code insert H
275. o hooks on the main unit Master System 2 Press two corners of the lower side of the System Inter Connection Card 3 Connect the cord to the System Inter Connection Card connector Im Tun Ta System Inter Connection Card ae ON 4 Open the latch on the card Sent Hy 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the Slave System Le using the other card N 6 Insert one Connection Cable end to the Master System and insert the other end to the Slave System 7 Close the latches on both systems e AT hmm Om Ve Connection Cable Available for KX TD1232 only Installation 2 69 2 4 9 System Connection 8 Open the ROM Cover in the Slave System and set the Master Slave Switch on the CPU Card to Slave position J AWTS 9 Turn the power on Notes e System Connection is completed about one minute later after the power is turned on e To turn the power on for the first time refer to Section 2 6 Starting the System for the First Time Programming References No prog
276. of digital and analog proprietary telephones DSS Consoles and single line devices such as single line telephones facsimiles and data terminals With the addition of optional System Inter Connection Card two Digital Super Hybrid Systems can be connected together to expand the system to a maximum of 24 CO lines and 64 extensions The two systems function as one however some functions such as paging and music on hold are duplicated 1 2 System Outline Available for KX TD1232 only 1 1 System Highlights Digital Proprietary Telephones DPT The system supports four different models of digital proprietary telephones which cover the range from a monitor set to a large display handsfree version Programming System The system can be programmed from a proprietary telephone or from a personal computer Voice Mail Integration The system supports Voice Processing Systems with in band DTMF signaling The Panasonic Voice Processing System provides automated attendant voice mail interview and bulletin board services Automatic Route Selection ARS Automatically selects the pre programmed least expensive route for outgoing toll calls Caller ID Allows the user to see the name or telephone number of a caller on the telephone display before answering the call To use the features of the Caller ID you are required to subscribe to the Caller ID identification service offered by your local telephone company for a fee Trunk
277. of seven digits 3 120 Features 3 Features T Applicable Denied and Excepted Code Tables depend on the assigned toll restriction level of an extension as follows Denied Code Tables Excepted Code Tables Level 1 None None Level 2 Table for Level 2 Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Level 3 Tables for Levels 2 and 3 Tables for Levels 3 through 6 Level 4 Tables for Levels 2 to 4 Tables for Levels 4 through 6 Level 5 Tables for Levels 2 to 5 Tables for Levels 5 through 6 Level 6 Tables for Levels 2 to 6 Tables for Level 6 Level 7 None None Level 8 None None Explanation Level 1 allows all calls Level 2 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Table for Level 2 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Level 3 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6 Level 4 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 4 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Tables for Levels 4 through 6 Level 5 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 5 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Tables for Levels 5 and 6 Level 6 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Table for Level 6 Level 7 Allows intercom calls only Level 8 Allows operator cal
278. ogram word length Display example Word Lengt 8bits 9 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 10 Press STORE 11 Press NEXT to program parity bit Display example Parity Mark 12 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 13 Press STORE 14 Press NEXT to program stop bit Display example Stop Bit l1bit 15 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 16 Press STORE 17 Press END Conditions e The following combinations are invalid Parity Word Length Stop Bit Mark 8 2 Space 8 1 Space 8 2 e The program address of the out of service system port is unacceptable Feature References Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 4 118 System Programming 4 9 Resource Programming 809 DISA Security Type Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the security mode for CO calls attempted by the DISA caller There are two modes Non Security and Trunk Security CO line security Non Security mode allows the caller to access a CO line without dialing a DISA user code Trunk Security mode requires the caller to enter a DISA User Code assigned in program 811 DISA User Codes before making a CO call Non non security Trunk trunk security Non 1 Enter 809 Display DISA Security 2 Press NEXT Display example Security Non 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the de
279. on jack number 2 CO 3 is connected to extension jack number 9 CO 4 is connected to extension jack number 10 CO 9 is connected to extension jack number 17 CO 10 is connected to extension jack number 18 Single line telephones can work in case of a power failure Connect these telephone instruments to the above extension jacks Conditions e All the other conversations except for the above combinations are disconnected during a power failure e Only CO line conversations can operate All the other features do not work 3 96 Features 3 Features Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 2 CO Line Connection 2 3 3 Extension Connection 2 4 2 4 CO Line Unit Connection 2 4 3 8 Station Line Unit Connection 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer Programming References Feature References Operation References No programming required Section 3 Features Power Failure Restart Not applicable Privacy Automatic Description Conditions By default all conversations established on CO lines extension lines and doorphone lines have privacy enabled Automatic privacy may be temporarily released for a three party conference which is established either by Executive Busy Override or Privacy Release Programming References Feature References Operation References Privacy Release Description No programming required Section 3 Features Executive Busy Override CO Executive Busy Ove
280. on the proprietary telephone shows as follows Example a Display of the caller s telephone number SCHMEIER Example b Display of the caller s name MARY WUNNEN Section 2 Installation 2 4 7 Caller ID Card Installation Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 110 Caller ID Code Set 111 Caller ID Name Set 406 Caller ID Assignment None Operation References Not applicable 3 36 Features Available for KX TD816C 1232C and KX TD816HK 1232HK only 3 Features C Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Description Conditions The Calling Party Control CPC Signal is an on hook indication disconnect signal sent from the CO line when the telephone is hung up at the other end To support efficient utilization of CO lines the system monitors their state and when CPC Signal is detected from a line the system disconnects the line and informs the extension with reorder tone e CPC Signal Detection is enabled or disabled on incoming and outgoing CO calls by System Programming e Generally CPC Signal Detection works on incoming CO calls and does not work on outgoing CO calls except once they are placed on Call Hold Exclusive Call Hold or Consultation Hold In this case if the extension user remains off hook after the completion of an outgoing CO call the system does not release all the switches used to establish the connection and a
281. on tone is sent Programming Reference No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Alternate Calling Ring Voice Operation References DPT Features User Manual Handsfree Answerback Handsfree Operation Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to dial and to talk to the other party without lifting the handset Pressing an appropriate button provides handsfree mode Conditions e This function can be utilized by pressing a button listed below when the SP PHONE MONITOR button indicator is off SP PHONE button MONITOR button INTERCOM button CO button e The KX T7050 and the KX T7250 can be used for handsfree dialing operations etc but cannot be used for handsfree conversation 3 70 Features 3 Features A e A single press of a One Touch Button DSS button REDIAL button or a SAVE button also provides handsfree mode if Full One Touch Dialing is enabled Programming References No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Full One Touch Dialing Operation References DPT Features User Manual Handsfree Operation Hold Recall Description Prevents a call on hold from being kept waiting longer than a pre determined time If the timer expires ringing or an alarm tone is generated as a reminder to the user who held the call If the user is on hook and its speaker phone is off the phone is rung If the user is off hook or in speakerphone mode when the timer expir
282. onal computer can be used to perform System Programming Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 115 S 3 Features Programming References Section 4 System Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment 107 System Password Feature References Section 3 Features System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer Operation References Not applicable System Speed Dialing Description This feature supports 100 abbreviated dial numbers available to all users A system speed dial number is dialed out by pressing the AUTO button and a 2 digit code 00 through 99 It is possible to store one hundred 24 digit telephone numbers per system maximum Conditions e Overriding Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing can be enabled or disabled by system programming For proprietary telephone users only e Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing manual dialing Last Number Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used in combination For single line telephone users only e If a stored feature number includes or a rotary or pulse single line telephones cannot use it Programming References Section 4 System Programming 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set 100 Flexible Numbering System speed dialing 300 TRS Override for System Speed Dialing Feature References Section 3 Features Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing Operation References DPT F
283. one Distinctive Voice Mail Integration DPT Features SLT Features Message Waiting Voice Mail Integration Allows the proprietary telephone user to turn off the microphone for privacy reasons e This is effective for the microphone only your voice will only be muted during a handsfree conversation e The user can hear the other party s voice during Microphone Mute Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual No programming required None DPT Features Microphone Mute Mixed Station Capacities Description Conditions Connection References This system supports a wide range of telephone sets not only Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT and Analog Proprietary Telephones APT in the Digital Super Hybrid System but also single line rotary telephones 10 pps 20 pps employing dial pulse signals and single line push button dialing telephones touch tone The super hybrid method used in this system allows any telephone to be connected to an extension modular jack without an adaptor If a telephone is replaced by another one the stored data such as feature button storage is held for the new one Section 2 Installation 2 3 3 Extension Connection 2 4 3 8 Station Line Unit Connection Features 3 83 M 3 Features Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Module Expansion Description The KX TD8
284. or KX TD1232 only 3 Features T e The alarm tone continues for 30 seconds To stop it lift the handset or with a proprietary telephone press any button e If a voice message is used when the user goes off hook during the alarm tone a pre recorded voice message is sent The message feature requires the optional DISA Card and the message is recorded by Operator 1 If the message is not enabled the user hears special dial tone Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 5 DISA Card Installation Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Timed reminder set cancel confirm 215 Outgoing Message Time Feature References Section 3 Features Outgoing Message OGM Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Timed Reminder Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 119 T Toll Restriction Description 3 Features Toll Restriction is a system programmable feature that in conjunction with the assigned Class of Service can prohibit certain extension users from placing unauthorized toll calls Every extension is programmed to belong to one of eight Classes of Service Each Class of Service is programmed to have a toll restriction level for day mode and night mode There are eight toll restriction levels available Toll restriction level 1 is the highest level and the level 8 is the lowest That is level 1 allows all toll calls and levels 7 and 8 d
285. other telephone if the call is ringing within the user s extension group e The user can pick up an incoming CO intercom or doorphone call e The priority of Group Call Pickup is as follows CO call gt Transferred call gt Extension call gt Doorphone call e Group Call Pickup starts with the lowest jack number e Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call pickup group 990 System Additional Information Field 16 None DPT Features SLT Features Call Pickup Group Features 3 31 C Call Pickup Deny Description Conditions 3 Features Allows the user to prohibit other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his her extension by using the call pickup features Distinctive Dial Tone is sent to the user on the extension with this feature when the user goes off hook Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Call Splitting Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call pickup deny set cancel Section 3 Features Call Pickup CO Line Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Directed DPT Features SLT Features Call Pickup Deny Allows the extension user to alternate between two other parties Placing the curr
286. phone 3 115 System Speed WR Eu 3 116 T Time Out Variable AAA AAA 3 117 reeL Eege 3 118 TOI ReStri Cts iediiswesiaiaichsdenssscchea Redu EAR dee 3 120 Toll Restriction for Special Carrier ACCESS eeecceceseceesseeeeeteeeennees 3 126 Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry cee eeeeeeeeeee 3 126 Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing eee 3 128 Trunk CO Line Answer From Any Station CTAA 3 128 U Unattended Conference Conference Unattended c ee 3 41 Unscreened Call Transfer to Extension Call Transfer Unscreened to Rstensgion eeeeeeeeeees 3 34 V gt V ice Mail Inte srationicn Wai dE 3 129 Volume Control Speaker Handset Receiver Headset Ringer 3 135 Section 4 System Programming 4 1 General Programming Instructions cccccssscccssscssssscssssseees 4 2 4 1 1 Using the Proprietary Telephone 4 3 4 1 2 Programming Ways EEN 4 7 4 1 3 Entering EE 4 9 4 1 4 Example of Programmmng 4 12 4 2 Manager Programming ccccccccssssscccssssssccsscsssccssssssccscsscssesees 4 14 000 Date and Time Set 4 14 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set 4 16 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set 4 18 Available for KX TD1232 only Contents 003 Extension Number Set 4 19 004 Extension Name Set 4 21 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment ccceccceeeseeeeeseeeeeteeeennees 4 23 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment
287. pose of the grounding type plug Use twisted pair cable for CO line connection CO lines should be installed with lightning protectors For details refer to Section 2 3 11 Installation of Lightning Protectors Warning grounding strap Static sensitive devices are used To protect printed circuit boards from static electricity do not touch connectors indicated to the right To discharge body static touch ground or wear a Warning Static sensitive connectors Installation 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 Unpacking Unpack the box and check the items below Installation of the Main Unit KX TD816 KX TD1232 Main Unit one one AC Cord one one Templet one one Screw three four Anchor Plug three four Pager Connector two Music Source Connector two Expansion line cord holder one one Plug Adaptor one 2 2 2 Name and Location Overview of the Main Unit WINI Power Indicator External Music Jack Paging Jack System Clear Switch Reset Button EIA RS 232C Connector mH
288. program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END 4 86 System Programming 45 CO Line Programming 411 Host PBX Access Codes conta Conditions Feature References This program is only required if a host PBX or Centrex line is connected to the system Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign the line to a CO line group There is a maximum of four access codes per CO line group Each code has one or two digits consisting of 0 through 9 and If conflicting access codes such as 8 and 81 are stored for the same CO line group the 1 digit code 8 only will be in effect When the programmed codes are dialed Automatic Pause Insertion and Toll Restriction are applied to the calls The programmed pause time in program 412 Pause Time is automatically inserted after the access code To assign all CO line groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 Section 3 Features External Feature Access Pause Insertion Automatic Host PBX Access System Programming 4 87 412 45 CO Line Programming Pause Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the length of the pause time The programmed pause time is automatically inserted after a line access code or a hos
289. ptional Cards Caller ID Cards Up to two Caller ID Cards KX TD193 for KX TD816 and up to three Caller ID Cards for KX TD1232 can be installed to the initially provided CO Line Card and 4 CO Line Unit This card supports Caller ID services offered by the central office The initially provided CO Line Card is located behind the inside cover KX TD816 Initial CO Line Card Install one Caller ID Cards KX TD193 nanAnnAAnAAAN gogoooo0o00ooo Inside cover KX TD1232 Initial CO Line Card Install up to two Caller ID Card KX TD193 DD 0 a 1 c i 1 Oo LC T Inside cover 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 inside the cabinet Install one Caller ID Card KX TD193 2 48 Installation Available for KX TD816C 1232C and KX TD816HK 1232HK only 2 4 2 4 CO Line Unit Connection Notes To add four CO lines CO 5 through CO 8 for KX TD816 and CO 9 through CO 12
290. r II CO 9 Extension T R of jack number 18 0 0 CO 10 Connect single line telephones to the above extension jacks Troubleshooting 6 7 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd Central P O Box 288 Osaka 530 91 Japan Printed in Japan PQQX10189VA S0294M6125M
291. r cabinet go down through the outside screw cabinet cover s To guard the cords 9 Cover the cords with the cord holder smooth the cut edge included Cut here i A D i g e If you attach the Caller ID Card KX TD193 to the 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 attach it before installing the 4 CO Line Unit to the main unit For installation Refer to Section 2 4 7 Caller ID Card Installation Cord holder 10 Fix the cords to the wall at the shown position so that the front cover can be opened D1232 Ir um Ee Installation 2 59 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 Amphenol 57JE Type screw attach type 50 pin connector Connection for KX TD170 To fix the Amphenol 57JE type screw attach type 50 pin connector to the 8 Station Line Unit follow the procedures below 1 The 50 pin connector Jack on the 2 To attach the Amphenol 57JE type Plug to Expansion Unit has two hook pins the connector drive the accessory screw at the Remove the upper hook pin taking out upper part the screw Fasten the accessory wire tie around the lower hook pin and the Amphenol 57JE type as shown Accessory screw Amphenol 57JE type
292. r cable cannot be used O gt S gt to Power Outlet Power Plug Plug Adaptor Installation 2 7 2 2 3 Wall Mounting This set is exclusively made for wall mounting only The wall where the main unit is to be mounted must be able to support the weight of the main unit If screws other than the ones supplied are used use the same sized diameter screws as the enclosed ones KX TD816 Mounting on Wooden Wall Mounting on Concrete or Mortar Wall 1 Place the templet included on the wall 1 Place the templet included on the wall to mark the three screw positions to mark the three screw positions 2 Drill three holes and drive the anchor plugs included with a hammer flush to the wall To the wall surface Concrete Wall Anchor Plug eS Tie 1 4 inch 29 mm 1 1 8 inch 2 Install the three screws included into the wall 3 Install the three screws included into the anchor plugs Drive the screw to this position Drive the screw to this position 2 8 Installation 2 2 3 Wall Mounting KX TD1232 Mounting on Wooden Wall 1 Place the templet included on the wall to mark the four screw positions 2 Install the four screws included into the wall Drive the screw to this position 3 Hook the main unit on the screw heads Mounting on Concrete or Mortar Wall 1 Place the templet included on the wall to m
293. r can select a desired tone frequency for each CO button Programming References No Programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Operation References Not applicable Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Description Allows the digital proprietary telephone user to select the desired ringer frequency for each CO button This provides discrimination of incoming CO calls Conditions There are eight ringer frequencies available One of them can be assigned to a CO button that is assigned as each of the following buttons Single CO Group CO or Loop CO button It is not possible to assign a ringer frequency to any other button 3 102 Features 3 Features S Programming References Feature References Operation References Secret Dialing Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming cceccceecceseeeeeeeteeeeenteeeeeees User Manual Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons None Not applicable Allows an extension user to conceal all or part of a registered telephone number that normally appears on the display during System Speed Dialing or One Touch Dialing Numbers can be assigned to Programmable Feature buttons on PT and DSS Consoles When a display telephone user makes a call to the telephone number that is set to Secret Dialing all or part of the number does not appear on the d
294. r to each extension e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part e Extension Number 2 through 4 digits KX TD816 Jack 01 1 through 16 1 101 through 116 Jack 01 2 through 16 2 201 through 216 KX TD1232 Jack 01 1 through 64 1 101 through 164 Jack 01 2 through 64 2 201 through 264 1 Enter 003 Display EXT Number Set 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display 01 1 EXT101 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 32 extension numbers for KX TD816 and 128 extension numbers for KX TD1232 Each extension number can be two three or four digits consisting of 0 through 9 The and keys cannot be used e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available System Programming 4 19 003 4 2 Manager Programming Extension Number Set conta Feature References An extension number is invalid if the leading first or second digits disagree with the setting of
295. ram 312 ARS Mode to enable it Step 2 Store the telephone number of an outside party that will use the ARS feature For example if the XYZ Company s telephone number is 1 234 567 8910 not including the line access code store the leading digits of the number 1234567 max 7 digits To store the numbers use one of the programs 314 through 321 ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 Leading Digit Tables 1 through 8 Here it is 3 6 Features 3 Features A supposed that we have selected Leading Digit Table 1 to store the number Remember that Table number 1 matches Route Plan Table 1 Example Program Address 314 Leading Digit Table 1 Location Entry 01 1234567 02 50 Table 1 Step 3 Check all carriers available to call the stored telephone number and their CO line groups Suppose there are three carriers available to call the XYZ Company and each carrier s line is assigned to a CO line group as follows Carrier E CO Line Group 1 Carrier F CO Line Group 2 Carrier G CO Line Group 3 Then check the fee charged by each carrier Carrier G We high SS E S E Charge ee f Carrier F i i low A Carrier E l a e e a e a 12 3 6 9 12 3 6 9 a m p m Table 2 Time As shown in Table 2 the least costly route varies with the time of day To select the least expensive line at a certain time split the day into three zones as follows 1 7
296. ramming required Feature References Section 3 Features System Connection 2 70 Installation Available for KX TD816 only 2 4 10 Backup Battery and Adaptor Card Connection The optional Backup Battery and Adaptor Card KX A216 are available for KX TD816 It is a backup power supply to operate all the features in the event of a power failure In case of power failure the battery automatically maintains the power to the main unit instantly for about 10 minutes The battery charges automatically by itself when it is discharged You can choose KX A216 or KX A46 for a backup power supply For connection of KX A46 see the next page 1 Loosen the screw of the adaptor card cover 3 Fasten the nylon belt to fix the battery and remove the adaptor card cover from Fix the adaptor card by a screw included the main unit Then attach the nylon belt f E belt amp Screw a 2 Insert the battery and adaptor card into the 4 Connect the cord of battery to the adaptor frame card Remove the backup battery connector cover on the main unit Then Backup Battery connect t
297. re References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel 991 COS Additional Information Field 2 Station Programming cccecceecceseeeteeeteeeeceteeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button Section 3 Features Call Forwarding All Calls Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Call Forwarding Follow Me Call Forwarding No Answer Description Conditions Calls to your extension are forwarded to another extension if you do not answer the call in a pre determined time e Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are CO calls DIL 1 1 DISA Intercept Routing Intercom calls Extension Transfer e This function operates if an incoming call is not answered in a specific period of time Therefore this function also applies if your extension is busy and cannot answer the incoming call within the time e There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding if a call is forwarded to a station which is also in Call Forwarding In this case Station Hunting is activated for the forwarded call e Although calls are forwarded Message Waiting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Hunting still applies
298. re number conflicts Examples 1 and 11 0 and 00 2 and 21 10 and 101 32 and 321 etc e Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active For example to set Call Waiting the feature number for Call Waiting must be followed by 1 and to cancel it the same feature number should be followed by 0 Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 003 Extension Number Set 100 Flexible Numbering None Operation References Not applicable Features 3 67 F 3 Features Floating Station Description You can assign virtual extension numbers for resources to make them appear to be extensions These numbers are defined as floating numbers FN The following resources can have floating numbers 1 External paging instruments used for TAFAS feature For KX TD816 one FN is available For KX TD1232 four FNs are available These FNs can be assigned as a DIL 1 1 destination b DISA destination c Intercept Routing destination 2 DISA messages used for DISA feature Two FNs are available These FNs can be assigned as a DIL 1 1 destination b Intercept Routing destination 3 Modem used for system administration One FN is available This can be assigned as a DIL 1 1 destination b DISA destination can also be used as an extension number to call the modem Conditions Floating numbers cannot be used for setting a feature such as Ca
299. rea for KX TD1232 There are three expansion areas on the main unit of KX TD1232 Up to two 8 Station Line Units and a 4 CO Line Unit can be installed to any area It is required to designate which is 8 Station Line Unit 1 and which is 2 by system programming If a telephone or answering machine with an A A1 relay is connected to the main unit set the A A1 relay switch of the telephone or answering machine to OFF position e Mis connection may cause the system to operate improperly See Section 6 1 1 Installation and 6 1 2 Connection Connection of Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles for KX TD816 Connection of an Analog Proprietary Telephone KX T7020 KX T7030 KX T7033 KX T7050 KX T7055 or KX T7130 4 conductor wiring is required for each extension Connect pins T R D1 and D2 T Tip D1 Data 1 R Ring D2 Data 2 Connection of a Digital Proprietary Telephone KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 or KX T7250 4 conductor wiring is required for each extension Connect pins D1 and D2 only CTT and R are only needed if Section 2 3 4 Paralleled Telephone Connection Method 2 is used for parallel or XDP connection of a DPT and a single line telephone Connection of a Single Line Telephone KX T7051 or KX T7052 2 conductor wiring is required for each extension Connect pins T and R Connection of a DSS Console KX T7040 or KX T7240 4 conductor
300. res shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables and ground the shields If cables are run on the floor use protectors or the like to protect 2 2 Installation 2 1 Before Installation the wires where they may be stepped on Avoid wiring under carpets Avoid using the same power supply outlet for computers telexes and other office equipment Otherwise the KX TD816 s and KX TD1232 s system operation may be interrupted by the induction noise from such equipment Please use one pair telephone wire for extension connection of telephone equipment such as single line telephones data terminals answering machines computers voice processing systems etc except proprietary telephones KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 etc The Power Switch of the system must be off during wiring After all the wirings are completed turn the Power Switch on Mis wiring may cause the system to operate improperly Refer to Section 6 1 1 Installation and Section 6 1 2 Connection If an extension does not operate properly disconnect the telephone from the extension line and then connect again or turn off the Power Switch of the system and then on again The KX TD816 KX TD1232 is equipped with a 3 wire grounding type plug This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet Do not defeat the pur
301. rride Line Extension Privacy Release Not applicable Allows the proprietary telephone user to release Automatic Privacy for an existing call in order to establish a three party call During a conversation with an outside party on a CO button the user can allow another extension party to join the conversation by pressing the CO button Features 3 97 P R 3 Features Conditions When a two party call is changed to a three party call and vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Section 4 System Programming 990 System Additional Information Field 13 Feature References Section 3 Features Privacy Automatic Operation References DPT Features User Manual Privacy Release Pulse to Tone Conversion Description This feature allows the extension user to change from pulse dial to tone DTMF dial so that the user can access special services such as computer accessed long distance call Conditions e This feature works only on CO lines set to Pulse Dialing mode or Call Blocking mode e Dial Type Selection provides selection of a dial mode for each CO line e This feature is unavailable to DISA callers e Changing tone to pulse is not possible Programming References Section 4 System Programming 402 Dial Mode Selection Feature References Section 3 Features Dial Type Selection Operation References DPT Features SLT Features
302. rsation is established just after dialing For example when accessing the following features by the feature numbers e Call Park Retrieve e Call Pickup e Hold Retrieve e Paging Paging Answer e TAFAS Answer This tone can be eliminated by System Programming so that the user can start talking instantly Is 1 1 j j I 1 1 1 e o engt i i i i i i i i 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 Confirmation tone 4 Sent when moving from a two party call to a three party call and vice versa These are caused by Executive Busy Override Conference or Privacy Release It is possible to eliminate this tone by System Programming ls i aas A O jj Conditions Confirmation Tone 1 and 2 are provided to reconfirm the assigned feature Programming References Section 4 System Programming 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone 990 System Additional Information Fields 13 16 Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Features 3 43 C 3 Features Consultation Hold Description Allows the extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to transfer it or make a Conference call or make Call Splitting The held call can be retrieved from other extensions Conditions e With a proprietary telephone Consultation Hold is established by pressing TRANSFER or CONF button With a single line telephone it is established by pressing the hookswitch lightly e With a single line telephone the user can hold a call onl
303. rwarding to CO Line DO Non Security CO Line Access using DISA DI through D4 DISA User Codes 1 through 4 RM Remote access to a modem To print out the record of System Programming items that have been assigned use the program 802 System Data Printout Conditions e Connect a printer provided with an EIA RS 232C interface to the EIA RS 232C connector located on the main unit After connecting a printer do not press the RETURN key if provided on the printer for 10 seconds e When programmed for outgoing toll calls only printing occurs only for calls which start with the numbers stored in any Denied Code Table from levels 2 to 6 If ARS is employed not the user dialed but modified number is checked against these tables e This system can store information on up to 100 calls If more calls are originated or received previous records are deleted starting from the oldest one e This data is not deleted when you reset the system e If the system clock is not set by System Programming or if the calendar IC is out of order the date and time is not printed out Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 109 S Connection References 3 Features e If FLASH is manually sent out during a conversation the call record is printed and a new record is started Section 2 Installation 2 3 10 Printer Connection Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 000 Date and Time Set 212
304. s Operation References Intercept Routing Description Section 4 System Programming 411 Host PBX Access Codes 412 Pause Time Section 3 Features External Feature Access Pause Insertion Automatic Not applicable Provides automatic redirection of incoming CO calls There are two types of Intercept Routing In the first case a call cannot be placed on the called party This is called Rerouting In the second case the call is not answered within a programmed time period This is called Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA Conditions e Intercept Routing applies to DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N DISA TAFAS Call Forwarding and Station Hunting e The final destination of intercepted calls must be programmed for day and for night modes There are three possible destinations 1 an extension 2 an external pager 3 a DISA outgoing message 3 72 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features I If the destination is in Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb does not function and the call is placed there Programming References Section 4 System Programming 203 Intercept Time 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Intercom Calling Description Allows the extension user to call another extension user within the system Conditions e Extension numbers are assigned to all extensions by System Programming An extension number is programmed to be two
305. s displayed Press STORE Press END KX TD1232 1 Enter 109 Display Expansion Card 2 Press NEXT to program Master System To program Slave press NEXT again Display example Master Cl1 E1 E2 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE If only one system is in operation go to step 8 5 Press NEXT to program Slave System Display example Slave C1 E1 E2 4 40 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 109 Expansion Unit Type conta 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END Conditions e There are two expansion areas in KX TD816 areas 1 and 2 from bottom to top One 8 Station Line Unit and one 4 CO Line Unit can be installed e There are three expansion areas in each system for KX TD1232 areas 1 2 and 3 from bottom to top Up to two 8 Station Line Units and one 4 CO Line Unit can be installed in each system e The out of service system is unassignable In this case skip the steps 5 through 7 for KX TD1232 e In the case of KX TD1232 if the Slave System only is in operation the display shows Slave at step 2 e After changing the setting to make your setting effective turn the Power Switch off and on once Otherwise the previous setting will be maintained Feature References Section 3 Features Module Expansion System Programming 4 4 110 4 3 System Pro
306. s No programming required Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Background Music BGM Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to listen to background music from the monitor speaker on the telephone Conditions The system except KX TD816C KX TD1232C has an internal music source It may be required to connect a user supplied external music source such as aradio One external music source can be connected to KX TD816 and up to two sources can be connected to KX TD1232 per system It is required to select the internal or external music source by System Programming It is required to select a music source used for BGM by System Programming The music is interrupted while off hooked Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 9 External Music Source Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 803 Music Source Use 990 System Additional Information Field 20 Features 3 11 B 3 Features Feature References Section 3 Features Music on Hold Operation References DPT Features User Manual Background Music BGM Background Music BGM External Description Background music BGM can be broadcast in your office through external pagers The BGM can be turned on and off by Operator 1 only Conditions e It is required to connect an external pager The pager is a user supplied item If the KX TD816C KX TD1232C is used an external music source i
307. s END e The times must be programmed in sequence from Time A to Time D Enter a starting time for each time schedule Select Disable for an unnecessary schedule e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS System Programming 4 7 314 32 45 TRS ARS Programming ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans I through 8 Description By entering numbers into each leading digit plan programs below you are starting the process to determine which CO line group will be used to route the call Program 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 Plan 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These eight plans are used to analyze the number which the user dials and to decide the route plan for the call If the user dialed number is registered in plan 1 then Routing Plan 1 is selected for the call ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 match ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 programs 322 through 329 respectively Selection e Location number 01 through 50 e Leading digit number 7 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter a program address 314 through 321 Display example ARS Leading PL 1 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a leading digit number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLE
308. s Not applicable Message Waiting Description The system supports the ability to inform the called party of a message waiting The user with a MESSAGE button knows there is a message if the LED of the MESSAGE button is lit red If the button is not provided nor assigned the called party hears special dial tone when he she goes off hook Pressing the lit MESSAGE button also means to call back the called party or listen to the messages which are stored in the mailbox of the Voice Processing System Conditions e For the proprietary telephone which is provided with no MESSAGE button a flexible CO button can be assigned as the MESSAGE button either by System or Station Programming e Cancelling the message can be performed from the extension setting it or from the extension receiving it e The system supports a maximum of 128 simultaneous messages e Messages are always left on the original extension It is not sent to a Call Forwarding or Station Hunting destination Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Message waiting set cancel callback Station Programming cceccceecceseereeeteeeeenteeeseees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Message Waiting MESSAGE Button 3 82 Features 3 Features M Feature References Operation References User Manual Microphone Mute Description Conditions Section 3 Features Dial T
309. s Operator and 2 Conditions None Programming References Section 4 System Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Operator call Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Operator Call Outgoing Message OGM Description Allows the extension assigned as Operator 1 to record outgoing voice messages There are two types of outgoing messages that can be recorded Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 89 P 3 Features DISA message This message is played when a caller accesses the DISA feature There can be two different DISA messages Timed Reminder message This message is used in Timed Reminder When answering the Timed Reminder alarm often used as wake up call the user will hear this message There can be only one Timed Reminder message After recording these messages Operator 1 can also play them back for confirmation Conditions e Outgoing messages are numbered as follows OGM 1 specifies DISA message 1 OGM 2 specifies DISA message 2 OGM 3 specifies Timed Reminder message e A DISA Card is required to program the OGM One card can be installed per system System Connection permits two DISA Cards If there are two DISA Cards the same message is recorded for both simultaneously Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 5 DISA Card Installation Programming References Section 4 System Programming
310. s also required One pager and one external music source can be installed in KX TD816 and up to two pagers and up to two external music sources can be installed in KX TD1232 per system It is programmable to select an internal or external music source for BGM Each pager can be programmed to send BGM or not Priority of access to external pager is 1 TAFAS 2 Paging 3 BGM Higher priorities will override BGM Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 8 External Pager Paging Equipment Connection 2 3 9 External Music Source Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Background music external on off 803 Music Source Use 804 External Pager BGM 990 System Additional Information Field 20 Feature References Section 3 Features Background Music BGM Operation References Operator Service Features User Manual Background Music BGM External 3 12 Features 3 Features B Busy Lamp Field Description Conditions The LED Light Emitting Diode indicators of the DSS Direct Station Selection buttons each of which corresponds to a selected extension tell whether the corresponding extensions are idle or busy e This function is available for DSS buttons on DSS Consoles and for flexible CO buttons assigned as DSS buttons on proprietary telephones e A DSS button indicator lights red if the corresponding extension is busy Programming References
311. s used for Music on Hold and Background Music is required e To adjust the sound level of the Music on Hold use the volume control on the external music source e The KX TD816BX and KX TD1232 D BX HK ML NL NZ D X systems are provided with an internal music source By default setting an internal music source is used as Music Source 1 for the systems System Programming is required to select external music source for the systems Programming References Section 4 System Programming 803 Music Source Use 990 System Additional Information Field 20 Feature References Section 3 Features Background Music BGM Background Music BGM External Music on Hold Installation 2 37 Section 2 Installation This section contains the basic system installation and wiring instructions as well as how to install the optional cards and units 2 1 Before Installation Please read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the system Safety Installation Instructions When installing telephone wiring basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following 1 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm 2 3 4 Installation Precautions This set is exclusively made for wall mounting only Avoid installing in the following places Doing so may result in malfunction noise or discoloration
312. sed Pulse to Tone Conversion e This function also applies to extension and conference calls Programming References Feature References No programming required Section 3 Features Dial Type Selection Pulse to Tone Conversion Operation References Not applicable Executive Busy Override CO Line Description Conditions Allows a proprietary telephone user to barge into an existing CO call either between two outside parties or between an outside and an inside party so as to establish a three party conference call It is possible for extension users to prevent this function from being executed by another extension user Executive Busy Override Deny e Class of Service programming determines the extension users who can perform Executive Busy Override and Executive Busy Override Deny Features 3 61 E 3 Features e The pre assigned extension users can barge in any CO line even if access to the line is not allowed by System Programming e This feature does not work if the extension has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security e When a two party call is changed to a three party call and vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties This tone can be eliminated by System Programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Executive busy override deny set cancel 505 Executive Busy Override 506 Executive Busy Override Deny 990 System Add
313. selection press PREV e To make a specific selection press SELECT and then enter the number System Programming 4 7 4 1 2 Programming Ways Going to another program address After pressing STORE you can go to another program with either of the following two methods 1 To go to the next larger program address Press Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME v DOWN e To go to the next smaller program address Press SHIFT Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME A UP 2 To go to a specific program address Press END then enter the Program Address Method 1 is useful when you want to perform a series of programs consecutively For example to change the programming in addresses 000 to 008 use this method You can move from 000 to 001 from 001 to 002 and so on by pressing the SKP or VOLUME V You can move in reverse order from 008 to 007 etc by pressing the SKP or VOLUME A This method can also be used to move between neighboring program groups For example you can move between the program addresses 008 and 100 116 and 200 and so on Also you can move between the smallest program address 000 and the largest one 992 y Method 2 is useful when you wish to jump to another program address For example you have just finished with program 006 and now you want to go to program 301 Neither SKP VOLUME V nor SKP VOLUME A is convenient in this case So you should press END and enter 301 Note The following programmi
314. sesessseeeseeeessessees e 4 71 401 CO Line Group Assignment 4 78 402 Dial Mode Selectpon 4 79 403 Pulse Speed Selections gen 4 80 404 DIMF Times so asi alsa a a a a Soke 4 81 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set 4 82 406 Caller ID Assignment cee eeesceceececeeececeeeeeceseeeeseeeeaees 4 83 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night 4 84 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night 4 85 411 Host PBX Access Codes ccccesssscececcceesesensecececeeeeessessnaees 4 86 412 Pause ht EE 4 88 13 Flash KU 4 89 414 Disconnect Jm 4 90 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set 4 9 416 Reverse Circuit Asstgenment ceceecescceceseceesseeeesteeeeaees 4 92 COS NU 4 93 S500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night 4 93 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Lamm 4 94 503 Call Transfer to CO lme ninias ii aieis 4 95 504 Call Forwarding to CO Line eeeecceeceeceseceesseeeesteeeeaees 4 96 505 Executive Busy Override sicis cccsazsscsestiensvcciiesbvenagessnacsavdgnenbewess 4 97 506 Executive Busy Override Deng 4 98 507 Do Not Disturb Overgde 4 99 508 Account Code Entry Mode ssseeeseeessseesseesseesseresseeessresseesse 4 100 Extension Programming eesssoessoessscsssecesocesooesoocssocsssocesocesooesoosesse 4 101 600 xa Device Port 4 101 601 Class OE Service sickest kh oe ete eda ihnelieha suas 4 102 602 Extension Group Assignment 4 103 603 604 DIL
315. sired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Program 811 DISA User Codes is used to program DISA User Codes Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA Available for KX TD1232 only System Programming 4 119 S10 4 9 Resource Programming DISA Tone Detection Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Enables or disables Tone Detection for DISA CO to CO calls Enabling tone detection allows the system to detect the end of the call Enable Disable Enable 1 Enter 810 Display DISA Tone Detect 2 Press NEXT Display Tone DTC Enable 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END None Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA 4 120 System Programming Available for KX TD1232 only 4 9 Resource Programming SII DISA User Codes Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the DISA User Codes and assigns a Class of Service COS to each code The COS of the code determines the toll restriction level of the DISA caller e DISA user code number 1 through 4 e DISA user code 4 digits e COS number 1 through 8 Code 1 1111 COS 1 Code 3 3333 COS 1 Code 2 2222 COS 1 Code 4 4444 COS 1 1 Enter 811 Display DISA User Code 2 Press NEXT Display User Code NO gt 3 Ent
316. sparent part into the black part Notes Do not peel off the coating of the wires Insert the wires to the ends 4 pin plug Jack 4 H Jack 3 H Jack 2 A DI T Jack 1 a R p Jacks 1 through 8 are located from bottom to top A To extensions Jacks 1 8 2 20 Installation 2 3 3 Extension Connection for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 2 Using 6 pin Connector for KX TD1232DBX DX Wire Specification The wire specifications are as follows Wire Solid wire Diameter of conductor 0 4 00 65 mm 22 24 26AWG Diameter including 0 66 01 05 mm Coating Connection Use 6 pin plugs included to connect extensions There are 16 plugs to connect extensions to jacks 1 through 16 1 Insert required telephone wires into the holes in a plug Fix the transparent part into the black part Notes Do not peel off the coating of the wires Insert the wires to the ends 6 pin plug EEE EEEE d B Jack 4 A H Jack 3 l Jack 2 P2 D1 T A Jack 1 R 3 D2 Pl o Demma RSR
317. ss This address is printed at the top of every page to allow you to quickly find the desired program 2 wm Running title tells you which group the program belongs to 3 4 wm Program title EA Provides a more detailed description of the program 5 Shows you choices that you can assign 6 7 wm Shows you the default factory setting wa Shows you programming procedures step by step e While programming use the overlay e Before starting to program enter the programming mode See Entering the programming mode on page 4 6 8 9 wm Enter the program address Esc The display shows the program title If your telephone has soft buttons the lower line shows the functions that are currently assigned to them 10 Press either Soft 3 NEXT shown on the display or the NEXT shown on the overlay 11 The message line advises you to enter a speed dial number 12 If the telephone number has already been stored the number is displayed 13 Enter the telephone number that you want to store Your entry is displayed as you enter the digits 14 Pressing CLEAR erases the whole entry 15 Your entry is now stored The indicator lights red and confirmation tone lets you know that the storage is completed 16 Select the best way for you to store another speed dial number Pressing the NEXT PREV allows you to select the next higher lower speed dial number You can also
318. sscccssececssceeescceeeteceeneeeees 3 39 CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing eee eeeeeeeseeeetteeees 3 39 CO Line Group EE 3 40 CONTETENCE ish eee Ee seed 3 41 Conference Unattended 0 ccccccccccsessssssessesssssssssssssssssssssssseseseeees 3 41 Confirmation Tone cccccsssscccccceceeeessccececececeesessnececescesenesssseaeeeeees 3 42 Consultation Holt g et Sst che e Seet OR 3 44 Data E EE 3 45 Delayed Ringing Ringing Delayed eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeneeenes 3 101 Dial Tone Distinctive ccc ccccceesesessssssssesssssssessssssssssssssssssseseseeees 3 45 Dial Type Selection ierg deet 3 46 Direct Incaines DUL aed SEs Eege a ea 3 48 Direct Inward System Access DISA ceseeesseceeeceeeeeeoeeeseetteees 3 48 Direct Station Selection DSS Button Button Direct Station SelecttOniSS 222s seen E 3 14 Directed Call Pickup Call Pickup Directed A 3 31 10 Available for KX TD816C 1232C and KX TD816HK 1232HK only 2 Available for KX TD1232 only Contents Display Call Information E 3 52 Display Extension Programmed Data 3 53 Display Self Extension Number AAA 3 54 Display Trek Date sissioni aiii ii its 3 54 Display Contrast Adjustment seseeseeesseseesessresressereresrersersrerrreseeseeee 3 55 D N t Dist rb DND Jire ienne iii i i 3 55 Do Not Disturb DND Ovemde 3 56 Door TEE 3 56 Doorpho e Call wcsssivsscsevassncesdenseaidassavkerasdecsdeasveraaea E r N
319. sssssssssssssesssssesssersseessessseresseessseessresse Buttons on PeoprgtategTelepheunerg nee sdete eegene CALL FORWARDING FEATURES SUMMARY eee all e All Calg sorcisti asesina Available for KX TD1232 only 2 Available for KX TD816C 1232C and KX TD816HK 1232HK only 7 Available for KX TD816 only Contents N Call F rwarding E 3 22 Call Forwarding Busy No Answer 3 23 Call Forwarding Follow Me 3 24 Call Forwarding No Answet cssccesoceeoceeeeceseccenseeconeeecenteees 3 24 Call Forwarding to LEE geesde 3 25 Call H ld CO ree ssi estou ve Sonsini ce GAG asleep 3 26 Call Hold tegen eh teteteg dee e edd 3 27 Call Hold Exclusive CO Lime 3 27 Call Hold Exclusive Intercom 3 28 Call Hold Retrieve CO Lime 3 28 Call Hold Retrieve Intercom 3 29 CaP ARR EE 3 29 Call Pieck p CO RE 3 30 Call Pickup Directed eege AEN 3 31 Call Pickup Gro p 2 3 0 bo egal eels EE 3 31 Call Pickup Deny eegene pees Arata iets 3 32 Call Splitting innn tege eege 3 32 CALL TRANSFER FEATURES SUMMARY sieeeeeieseessssssssesseee 3 33 Call Transfer Screened to CO Lime 3 33 Call Transfer Screened to Extension 0 ccccccccseseseesseereserereeeeees 3 34 Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension 3 34 Call EEN 3 35 Caller EE 3 36 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detecton eeeeeeeeeee 3 37 ClasS OF Service Eeer 3 38 CO Line Connection Assignment ccce
320. stem Outline Available for KX TD1232 only LA Options 1 4 4 DISA Card KX TD191 This card is required to use the Direct Inward System Access DISA feature and to record an Outgoing Message DISA allows you to access the desired destination in the system directly from an external telephone Once you have accessed the DISA line just dial the extension number The Outgoing Messages OGM for the external callers can be recorded if necessary and or an OGM for Timed Reminder can be recorded Sa Central aia Office A Telephone Line External Telephone 1 4 5 Caller ID Card KX TD193 Supports the Caller ID service of the central office Caller ID allows the extension user to see the name or phone number of an external caller on the display before answering the call 1 4 6 Remote Card KX TD196 The Remote Card allows programming and maintenance of the system from a remote location l roy Office A r I Telephone Line ZK Si Personal Computer with Modem Available for KX TD1232 only System Outline 1 7 2 Available for KX TD816C 1232C and KX TD816HK 1232HK only LA Options 1 4 7 Doorphone Card KX TD160 This card supports two doorphones and two door openers The doorphone is an option
321. still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb functions if any e Class of Service programming determines the extensions that are able to perform the function e If an extension is limited by the program 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit according to its Class of Service the extension is unable to forward a CO call to a CO line es If the KX TD816NL 1232NL is used the conversation between two outside parties is canceled except using DISA feature Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 25 3 Features e If a call between an extension and an outside party is established by this feature the duration of the call period can be restricted depending on the setting of a system timer If a call between two outside parties is established by this feature the duration of the call is determined by another system timer Alarm tone is generated to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time out The call is disconnected at the time out Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time 206 CO to CO Call Duration Time 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 504 Call Forwarding to CO Line
322. striction Level 8 Extension Group 8 Class of Service 8 Message Waiting 128 Available for KX TD1232 only System Outline 1 15 2 Available for KX TD816C 1232C only 2 3 1 System Connection Diagram KX TD1232 Printer for SMDR or Personal Computer for System Programming a Seite Battery Adaptor KX A46 Two car batteries connected in series e Consisting of two 12 VDC To AC Outlet Amplifier D lz Amplifier Speaker External Music Source 2 2 14 Installation 2 3 1 System Connection Diagram KX TD1232 CO Lightning Protectors to CO s 1 through 8 initial 12 CO Lines ito CO s 9 through 12 additional NESSLE Geh ee A Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Y ay two pair KX T7235 D D Dy ly QE W aus two pair KX T7230 Ly D Y y fr G Kes one pair two pair TS a N Vax OTS wo TS pair KX T7130 two pair Telephone Answering Machine with Facsimile 5 wm pair KX T7033 It is recommended that extension of jack 1 is a display proprietary Voice Processing System telephone KX T7040
323. system and if you turn the power off do not perform the above procedures to start the system again Otherwise your programmed data is cleared To start the system just turn the Power Switch on The power socket wall outlet should be located near this equipment and be easily accessible Installation 2 77 Leh System Restart Notice After starting the system if the system does not operate properly restart the system Before restarting the system try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not System Restart causes the following 1 Camp on is cleared 2 Calls on Hold are terminated 3 Calls on Exclusive Hold are terminated 4 Calls in progress are terminated 5 Call Park is cleared Other data except the above are not cleared by System Restart 1 Make sure that the System Clear Switch is set to the NORMAL position 2 Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool After pressing the Reset Button if you notice that the System Clear Switch is set to the CLEAR position never slide the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL position in 20 seconds Otherwise all the system programming data are reset to default values Refer to Section 2 8 System Data Clear Slide to the NORMAL position over 30 seconds later Then the system works as before If the system still does not operate properly please see Section 6 1 4 Using Reset Button 2 78
324. t PBX access code programmed in 411 Host PBX Access Codes or manually inserted if the PAUSE button is pressed by the user e CO line group number 1 through 8 x all CO line groups e Time seconds 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 All CO line groups 1 5 s 1 Enter 412 Display TRG Pause Time 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter a CO line group number To enter CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 1 5sec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all CO line groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 e Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign each CO line to a CO line group Section 3 Features Host PBX Access Pause Insertion Automatic 4 88 System Programming 4 5 CO Line Programming 413 Flash Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the length of the flash time If your system is installed behind a host PBX or Centrex line External Feature Access EFA is necessary to obtain their services To enable it select a required hooking signal sending time for the CO line group e CO line group T
325. t an appropriate pulse speed pulse break ratio and inter digit pause for the line if needed If a line is assigned DTMF select an appropriate DTMF duration for the line if needed After a held call is retrieved the dial mode goes back to the one originally programmed on the CO line Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 402 Dial Mode Selection 403 Pulse Speed Selection 404 DTMF Time 990 System Additional Information Fields 17 21 Section 3 Features End to End DTMF Signaling Pulse to Tone Conversion Tone Through Operation References Not applicable Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 47 D 3 Features Direct In Lines DIL Description Enables an incoming CO call to go directly to one or more answering points DIL 1 1 puts an incoming CO call to a single destination Assignable destinations are 1 extension 2 modem 3 external pager 4 DISA message This CO line can be used by multiple extension users to make calls but can be used by only one extension to receive calls DIL 1 N puts an incoming CO call to multiple destinations Assignable destinations are extensions only This CO line can be used by multiple extension users to make and receive calls Both DIL 1 1 and 1 N can have different destinations for day and night modes Night Service Conditions e Ifa CO line is programmed for both DIL 1 1 and DIL 1 N it is regarded as a DIL 1 1 line
326. tation Lock Control Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Station Programming Data Default Set Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to return all the following items programmed on the telephone to default setting Programming Items Default Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Tone 1 Full One Touch Dialing Assignment On Handset Headset Selection Handset Intercom Alerting Assignment Tone Call Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Ringing Line Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Intercom Line Station Programming is used to set or cancel these items at individual telephones Conditions None Programming References Station Drosramming eseese sees seessres seerste User Manual Station Programming Data Default Set Feature References Section 3 Features Station Programming Operation References Not applicable Features 3 111 S 3 Features Station Speed Dialing Description Conditions Allows an extension user to store frequently dialed numbers in order to place a call with abbreviated dialing It is performed by dialing the feature number and a speed dial number from 0 through 9 Up to 10 numbers can be stored for each telephone e Station Speed Dialing can be followed by manual dialing to supplement the dialed digits e You may make a call with One Touch Dialing button instead of Station Speed Dialing e The single line telephone SLT may be replaced by a proprietary
327. te CO CO line access button PF Programmable Feature button System Outline 1 5 1 4 Options 1 4 1 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 Each unit adds eight extensions One expansion unit for KX TD816 and up to two expansion units for KX TD1232 can be installed per system II KX TD1232 KX TD816 i Im 3 16 extensions m 8 extensions x initial initial L 8 or 16 extensions L 8 extensions can be added can be added 1 4 2 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 Adds four CO lines One expansion unit can be added for a maximum of 8 CO lines for KX TD816 and 12 CO lines per system for KX TD1232 KX TD1232 KX TD816 1 8 CO lines 4CO lines SS T S l a ZE initial initial L 4 CO lines can __ 4 CO lines be added can be added 1 4 3 System Inter Connection Card KX TD192 M orz 7 H Connection Cable Permits two Digital Super Hybrid Systems to be connected together to double system capacity 1 6 Sy
328. telephone KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 or KX T7250 and a single line telephone can be connected to the same extension jack yet have different extension numbers eXtra Device Port feature System Programming is required for this jack Method 1 4 conductor wiring cord Connect pins D1 and D2 only CTT and R are not necessary 2 conductor wiring cord Connect pins T and R Digital Proprietary Telephone KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7051 or KX T7052 KX T7235 KX T7250 Single Line Telephone Notes The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit Method 2 Section 2 3 5 Paralleled Telephone Connection Method 2 for Digital Proprietary Telephone only is also available for XDP connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 600 EXtra Device Port Feature References Section 3 Features EXtra Device Port XDP 2 32 Installation 2 3 7 Polarity Sensitive Telephone Connection If your telephone is polarity sensitive follow the procedures below Extension BCC gee Dem ER ER Zon Extension Central Office Line L Reverse here 1 2 Complete all the required extension wirings Confirm that dialing can be done from all the extensions using a touch tone telephone If you fail
329. the DSS button Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Operator Description Section 4 System Programming 108 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Section 3 Features Button Direct Station Selection DSS DPT Features Call Transfer to Extension DSS Console Features Call Transfer The system supports up to two operators Any extension can be appointed as an operator The extension assigned as Operator has the ability to perform the following operations e Switching Day Night mode manually e Setting clearing station lockout remotely 3 88 Features 3 Features O e Turning Background Music External on and off e Recording and playing outgoing messages Conditions If eXtra Device Port mode is enabled at the operator s extension the proprietary telephone user is regarded as the operator e The operator can be assigned as a destination of the Transfer Recall by System Programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Operator call 990 System Additional Information Field 11 Feature References None Operation References Operator Service Features User Manual Operator Call Description Allows the extension user to call an extension operator by dialing the feature number if at least one operator is assigned There can be one or two extensions assigned a
330. the extension which has the highest jack number in the group VM hunting All the VM ports are hunted until an idle one is found to permit VM Service AA hunting All the AA ports are hunted until an idle one is found to permit AA Service One of the hunting types is selected for each extension group Features 3 107 S Conditions 3 Features e If all the searched extensions are busy a busy tone is sent to the caller e If the called extension has set Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding Station Hunting skips the extension Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type 602 Extension Group Assignment Section 3 Features Extension Group Voice Mail Integration Operation References Not applicable Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Description Station Message Detail Recording SMDR automatically records detailed call information for CO calls A printer connected to the EIA RS 232C port can be used to print incoming and outgoing CO calls as well as print a hard copy of System Programming To print the call records use the program 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout which allows you to print out the following records e Records of all outgoing CO calls or outgoing toll calls e Record of incoming CO calls An example of a printed call record Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Duration Acc code CD 06 24 93 10 03AM 1
331. the new selection 6 To program another field repeat steps 4 and 5 7 Press STORE 8 To program another area press SELECT and the desired area code 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END None See References shown above 4 130 System Programming 4 10 Option Programming 991 COS Additional Information Description Selection Default Programming 1 Sets the number of digits allowed to dial out during a CO call on a Class of Service COS basis If an outside party hangs up and the extension user tries to dial out still on the CO line the system will disconnects the line at the time the assigned digits are dialed This program can be added if CPC Signal Detection is not provided by the CO The Field 1 shown below is used to enter your selection 2 Enables or disables the Call Forwarding Follow Me feature on a COS basis The Field 2 below is used to enter your selection Display example eps Fel en UP es Flt Ue al ee ER OK sO Field number unused 2 1 e COS number 1 through 8 all COS e Field number 1 or 2 e Selection for field 1 0000 no limit 0001 1 digit 0010 2 digits 0011 3 digits 0100 4 digits 0101 5 digits 0110 6 digits 0111 7 digits 1000 8 digits 1001 9 digits 1010 10 digits 1011 11 digits 1100 12 digits 1101 13 digits 1110 14 digits 1111 15 digits e Selection for field 2 0 disable 1 enab
332. the program 100 Flexible Numbering 01 16 Ist through 16th hundred extension blocks If one digit is assigned as the leading digit some extensions have two digits and some have three digits If two digits are assigned some have three digits and some have four digits Two extension numbers can be assigned per jack If XDP is disabled for the jack in program 600 EXtra Device Port the extension number of the second part XX 2 is not available XX jack number For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 Double entry or incompatible entry is invalid including the assignment of program 813 Floating Number Assignment Valid entry examples 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry examples 10 and 106 210 and 21 Program 004 Extension Name Set is used to give names to extension numbers Section 3 Features Display Call Information EXtra Device Port XDP Flexible Numbering Intercom Calling Special Features for KX T7235 Extension Dialing 4 20 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 004 Extension Name Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Assigns names to the extension numbers programmed in program 003 Extension Number Set e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part e Name 10 characters max All jacks Not s
333. the telephone type e With a digital proprietary telephone press the volume control button VOLUME a v UP DOWN to select a desired volume level However the ringer volume of KX T7220 and KX T7250 is selected with Ringer Volume Selector OFF LOW HIGH e With other proprietary telephones slide the following levers located on the left side of the telephone Volume Control MIN MAX Handset Headset Volume Selector NORMAL MID HIGH Ringer Volume Selector OFF LOW HIGH Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Configuration User Manual Volume Control Handset Receiver Headset Ringer Speaker Features 3 135 Section 4 System Programming This section provides step by step programming instructions for a proprietary telephone 4 1 General Programming Instructions Default Setting This system has a default factory setting If any of the programming needs to be changed you will find the necessary information in Section 3 Features This makes the system very simple to install and customize as required by the customer Any required changes can be written on Programming Tables Required Telephone Set One of the following telephone sets is required for System Programming e Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT KX T7235 KX T7230 e Analog Proprietary Telephone APT KX T7130 KX T7030 Extensions Used for Programming Connect one of the above
334. thout knowing the mailbox number e Required entries selections LV MSG Leave Message This command is transmitted to a VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the port AA SVC Automated Attendant Service If AA Service is set to Start in program 990 field 10 the AA SVC command is sent toa VM port if an incoming CO call is answered by the VM port e Other programming required program addresses 106 602 609 990 field 10 990 field 18 2 Hearing the message at the extension If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button indicator of the concerned telephone the telephone user can hear the message by pressing the MESSAGE button e Required entries selections GETMSG Get Message This command is transmitted toa VM port when the message receiver presses the MESSAGE button VM SVC Voice Mail Service The VM SVC command is a code transmitted preceding the GETMSG command above This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the MESSAGE indicator e Other programming required program addresses 609 990 field 18 B If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant AA Service An AA port answers an incoming CO call to provide AA services such as call transfer receiving a message e Required entries selections VM SVC Voice Mail Service The VM SVC command is a code transmitted before LV MSG code if Operator tra
335. thout lifting the handset or pressing the SP PHONE MONITOR button Conditions This feature permits the user to specify the desired line to be answered if multiple incoming lines are ringing Programming References No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment Operation References DPT Features User Manual Answering Direct CO Line 3 4 Features 3 Features A Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Description Allows the caller to be informed when the called party has completed the current call Automatic Callback Extension If the caller answers the callback ringing the called extension automatically starts ringing again Automatic Callback CO Line If the caller answers the callback ringing the line is automatically selected to allow the user to make a CO call Conditions e Off hook prior to the start of callback ringing cancels this function If the callback ringing is not answered in four rings within 10 seconds the callback is cancelled e More than one extension user can set this function to one extension or CO line at the same time Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Features 3 5 A 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Description Automatic Route Selection ARS is a system programmable feature that autom
336. three or four digits e Names can be given to extension numbers by System Programming An extension number and a name if programmed is shown on the display PT during an intercom call e DSS buttons permit one touch access to an extension and provide Busy Lamp Field e KX T7235 user can make an extension call with an extension dialing directory on the display e After dialing an extension number the user will hear one of the following Ringback tone indicates that the other extension is being called Confirmation tone indicates that the user can perform Voice Calling Busy tone indicates that the other extension is busy Do Not Disturb tone indicates that the other extension has DND assigned Programming References Section 4 System Programming 003 Extension Number Set 004 Extension Name Set 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks Features 3 73 L 3 Features Station Programming ccccccccceseceseeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment DSS Button Feature References Section 3 Features Busy Lamp Field Button Direct Station Selection DSS Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Intercom Calling LED Indication CO Line Description The LED Light Emitting Diode indicators of the buttons associated with CO lines tell the line conditions with a variety of lighting patterns This a
337. through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 e The system supports a maximum of eight jacks 16 jacks during System Connection for connection to a Voice Processing System as the Voice Mail or Automated Attendant ports e Each mailbox number has a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 and PAUSE e To display parts of the mailbox number which have scrolled off the display press or Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration 4 110 System Programming 4 9 Resource Programming 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to determine which calls will produce an SMDR printout e Outgoing calls All all calls Toll toll calls only Off no printing e Incoming calls On all calls Off no printing Outgoing calls All Incoming calls On 1 Enter 800 Display Duration Log 2 Press NEXT to program outgoing calls Display Outgoing All 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to program incoming calls Display Incoming On 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 7 Press STORE 8 Press END e It is necessary
338. tion Description Allows you to select the desired dialing mode for each CO line regardless of the type of extension originating the call rotary or tone There are three dialing modes available DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Mode The dialing signal from an extension either in tone or rotary is converted to tone dialing DTMF signals are transmitted to the CO line Pulse Dial Rotary Mode The dialing signal from an extension either in tone or rotary is converted to rotary dialing Rotary pulses are 3 46 Features 3 Features D Conditions transmitted to the CO line Call Blocking Mode Set this mode on CO lines that can receive both tone and rotary but under contract with the Central Office for rotary only When dialing to the line using a touch tone telephone only rotary is sent to the Central Office e It is possible for the extension user to temporarily convert the pre assigned rotary dialing mode to DTMF mode Pulse to Tone Conversion DTMF mode cannot be changed to rotary Ether DTMF or rotary dialing can be assigned for the DISA Direct Inward System Access outgoing line With DISA Pulse to Tone Conversion is not possible In case a CO line can receive both DTMF and pulse signals and is contracted for DTMF with a Central Office DTMF mode should be selected for the line If it is contracted for rotary mode Call Blocking mode should be selected for the line If a line is assigned Pulse Dial mode selec
339. tions in place of ARS e Programs 313 through 331 are used to program ARS Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Line Access Automatic 4 70 System Programming 4 5 TRS ARS Programming 313 ARS Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns times for the four ARS time schedules It is possible to split a day into four time zones maximum so that the least expensive line is selected for that time According to the service hours and charges offered by your carriers enter the starting time of each zone Time schedule Time A Time B Time C Time D e Time hour 1 through 12 Disable no schedule s AM PM Time A 8 00 AM Time B 5 00 PM Time C 9 00 PM Time D Disable 1 Enter 313 Display ARS Time 2 Press NEXT to program Time A Display example Time A 8 00 AM To program another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed 3 Enter the hour To set no schedule Disable press SELECT and go to step 6 If Disable is selected pressing SELECT shows the previous stored hour To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new hour 4 Press to select AM PM 5 Press SELECT for AM or PM 6 Press STORE 7 To program another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed 8 Repeat steps 3 through 7 9 Pres
340. to CO Line Conference Unattended Call Transfer Screened to CO Line Operation References Not applicable Line Access Automatic Description Allows the extension user to dial the automatic line access number and access an idle line from the CO line groups assigned for the extension The proprietary telephone user can use the Loop CO button in place of the access number Conditions e This feature functions with Automatic Route Selection ARS if ARS is enabled If so the least expensive route is automatically selected e Each extension is subject to System Programming items for CO lines available to access e An idle CO line is selected from the CO line groups assigned to the station If one CO line group is available an idle line is selected from that group If multiple CO line groups are available the CO line group hunting sequence is determined by System Programming e This feature requires a CO button G CO L CO or S CO assignment on a proprietary telephone PT Dialing the line access code selects a 3 76 Features 3 Features L CO button on a PT according to the priority S CO gt G CO gt L CO on a hunted CO line group e If Idle Line Preference Outgoing is set on the telephone the user can access an idle line only by going off hook e The system waits for a programmed time before dialing after a CO line is seized Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Automatic li
341. to Section 3 Pause Insertion Automatic To store the feature number to convert pulse signals to DTMF signals press the keys Refer to Section 3 Pulse to Tone Conversion To prevent the display of all or part of the number press SECRET before and after confidential parts of the number The SECRET button must always be entered in a pair Or your entry is not stored Refer to Section 3 Secret Dialing If you are storing an external number include the line access code default 9 0 81 through 88 before the number When dialing pause is automatically inserted after the code If you are storing an account code enter the account code before the line access code Refer to Section 3 Account Code Entry It is possible to store a number consisting of 25 digits or more by storing it in two speed dial numbers A line access code should not be stored in the second speed dial number To go to another speed dial number at steps 3 through 6 press SELECT and start with step 3 To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display press gt or lt Program 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set is used to give names to speed dial numbers Feature References Section 3 Features Special Features for KX T7235 System Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing System Programming 4 17 002 4 2 Manager Programming System Speed Dialing Name Set Description Selection Defau
342. to alternate Soft 1 Soft 2 Type 5 SKP SEL NEXT j Cc q gt a D e Soft3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT Press SHIFT to alternate gt Sig2 CAS lina W Soft 1 Soft 2 Note Using the Overlay Soft 3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT You can use either the soft buttons or the overlay buttons For overlay buttons refer to Using the Overlay below Throughout the programming you will see instructions such as Press PREV If you use the soft buttons this means press SHIFT release SHIFT and then press Soft 3 The PREV function is performed If you use the soft buttons and if programming instructions tell you to press the following buttons you may press soft buttons shown below Instructions Soft button SELECT SEL SEL or SEL CLEAR CLR A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory This overlay should be used at all times while in programming mode since the functions of the telephone keys change while in programming mode as follows The original names are in parentheses 4 4 System Programming 4 1 1 Using the Proprietary Telephone During Operation During Programming PAUSE PAUSE PROGRAM SP PHONE NEXT REDIAL PREV PREVIOUS AUTO ANSWER MUTE SELECT FLASH FLASH TRANSFER CLEAR FWD DND gt CONF lt INTERCOM SECRET AUTO D
343. to connect a printer to the EIA RS 232C port provided on the system e If Toll is selected the system will print out all the calls starting from the numbers stored in programs 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR System Programming 4 111 SU 4 9 Resource Programming SMDR Format Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to match the SMDR output to the paper size being used in the printer Page length determines the number of lines per page Skip perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page e Page length lines 4 through 99 e Skip perforation lines 0 through 95 Page length 66 Skip perforation 0 1 Enter 801 Display SMDR Format 2 Press NEXT to program page length Display example Page Length 66 3 Enter the page length To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new page length 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to program skip perforation Display example Skip Perf 0 6 Enter the skip perforation To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new skip perforation he Press STORE 8 Press END e The page length should be four lines or more longer than the skip perforation length e A title is positioned on the first three lines on every page e The programmed format becomes valid only
344. to do that the polarity between the extension and the system must be reversed Reverse as shown Set the Power Switch on the main unit to OFF position Connect all CO lines Confirm that dialing can be done on the following extensions using a tone telephone KX TD816 Extension T R of jack leeeCO 1 Extension T R of jack 2 CO 2 Extension T R of jack 9 and 10 Extension Expansion Card e CO 5 and CO 6 KX TD1232 Extension T R of jack leeeCO 1 Extension T R of jack 2 CO 2 Extension T R of jack 9 eeCO 3 Extension T R of jack 10 eCO 4 Extensions T R of jacks 17 and 18 Extension Expansion Card 1 eCO 9 and CO 10 Note Extensions of jacks 9 and 10 for KX TD816 and 17 and 18 for KX TD1232 depend on the Power Failure Transfer connection For details refer to Section 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer If you fail to do that the polarity between the system and the CO line must be reversed Reverse as shown Every time an extension telephone is replaced repeat the above procedures Notes The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit Installation 2 33 2 3 8 External Pager Paging Equipment Connection KX TD816 One external pager user supplied can be connected to KX TD816 as illustrated below Use an RCA connector and shielded cable e Output impedance 600 Q Maximum length of the cable AWG 18 22 Under 10 m 33 feet P
345. tor Which method should be used depends on the model number of the system as shown below Model number Connector to be used KX TD816BX HK ML 4 pin Connector KX TD1232DBX DX 6 pin Connector KX TD816C NL NZ Modular Connector KX TD1232BX C HK ML NL NZ X Amphenol Connector Maximum cabling distance of the extension line cord twisted cable The maximum length of the extension line cord twisted cable that connects the main unit and the extension is shown below 26 AWG Under 140 m 460 feet 24 AWG Under 229 m 750 feet 22 AWG Under 360 m 1180 feet Proprietary Telephone Single Line Telephone 26 AWG Under 698 m 2290 feet 24 AWG Under 1128 m 3700 feet 22 AWG Under 1798 m 5900 feet 26 AWG Under 140 m 460 feet 24 AWG Under 229 m 750 feet y 22 AWG Under 360 m 1180 feet DSS Console gt KX T7240 KX T7040 Notes The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit Installation 2 19 2 3 3 Extension Connection for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 1 Using 4 pin Connector for KX D816BX HK ML Connection Use 4 pin plugs included to connect extensions There are 8 plugs to connect extensions to jacks through 8 1 Insert required telephone wires into the holes in a plug Fix the tran
346. tor see page 2 60 10 Fix the cords to the wall at the shown position so that the front cover can be opened 7 Tie up all the cords into a bundle If other cords are coming from the upper cabinets tie them too 8 Close the cabinet cover and secure the outside screw 9 Cover the cords with the cord holder included ul ll d TUT UK ei notaer Panasonic Installation 2 53 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 Notes e If two expansion units are installed cut e If you attach the Caller ID Card KX the cabinet cover s on the lower TD193 to the 4 CO Line Unit KX cabinet s to let the cords from upper TD180 attach it before installing the 4 cabinet go down through the cabinet CO Line Unit to the main unit For cover s To guard the cords smooth the installation refer to Section 2 4 7 Caller cut edge ID Card Installation Cut here II 2 54 Installation 2 4 4 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 KX TD1232 The following procedures can be used to install either 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 or 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 for KX TD1232 The KX TD170D and the KX TD180D are available for the KX TD1232DBX X only The mo
347. tored 1 Enter 004 Display EXT Name Set 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display 01 1 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 32 names for KX TD816 and 128 names for KX TD1232 Each name has a maximum of 10 characters e Program 003 Extension Number Set is used to assign extension numbers System Programming 4 21 004 4 2 Manager Programming Extension Name Set contd e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 Feature References Section 3 Features Display Call Information Intercom Calling Special Features for KX T7235 Extension Dialing 4 22 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Description Used to determine the use of the flexible CO buttons on proprietary telephones from a c
348. ture References Section 3 Features Redial Automatic System Programming 4 59 210 4 4 Timer Programming Automatic Redial Interval Time Description Sets the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts Selection Time seconds 3 through 120 x 10 is the actual time Default Model Number Default KX TD816BX ML NZ 60 S KX TD1232 D BX ML NZ KX TD816C 1232C 40s KX TD816HK 1232HK 900 s 15 min KX TD1232 D X Programming 1 Enter 210 Display Interval Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 40 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e You enter a number from 3 through 120 The actual time is 10 times your input e Program 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times is used to set the number of times Automatic Redial is tried e You cannot leave the entry empty Feature References Section 3 Features Redial Automatic 4 60 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 211 Dial Start Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the number of milliseconds the system waits before dialing after a CO line is seized Time milliseconds 0 through 40 x100 is the actual time Model Number Default KX TD816BX C ML NZ KX TD1232 D BX C ML NL NZ D X ae KX TD816HK 1232HK 1000 ms 1 Enter 211 Display CO Dial Start pA
349. two to four digits in length Any number can be set as the leading first or second digit If one digit is assigned as the leading digit some extensions have 2 digit numbers and some have 3 digit numbers If two digits are assigned as the leading digits some have 3 digit numbers and some have 4 digit numbers Features 3 65 F 3 Features Flexible Feature Numbers Number Feature Default 01 1st hundred extension block 1 02 2nd hundred extension block 2 03 16 3rd through 16th hundred extension block None 17 Operator call OGD 18 Automatic line access ARS 9 GD 19 CO line group line access 8 20 System speed dialing x 21 Station speed dialing 3 22 Station speed dialing programming 30 23 Doorphone call 31 24 _ Paging external 32 25 __ Paging external answer TAFAS answer 42 26 Paging group 33 27 Paging group answer 43 28 Call pickup CO line 4 29 Call pickup group 40 30 Call pickup directed 41 31 Call hold 50 32 Call hold retrieve intercom 51 33 Call hold retrieve CO line 53 34 Last number redial 35 Call park call park retrieve 52 36 Account code entry 49 37 __ Door opener 55 38 External feature access 6 39 Station feature clear 790 40 Message waiting set cancel callback 70 41 Outgoing message recording playing 36 42 Call forwarding do not
350. umber from the Leading Digit Table Call is routed via an idle line i Determines the CO line group of the priority 1 in the Route Plan Table by the present time of the day l Is there any line available in the CO line group of the priority 1 Yes Obtains applicable Modification Yes Yes Table number for the CO line 2 assigned in Route Plan Table group from the Route Plan Table Y Modifies the digits No Is the CO line group of the priority Is there any line available in the CO line group of the priority 2 No No Is the CO line group of the priority Calls 3 assigned in Route Plan Table No Yes y U Is there any line available in the No CO line group of the priority 3 Si Sends busy tone Yes 3 10 Features 3 Features AB Automatic Station Release Description After going off hook if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a specified time period the user will be disconnected from the line after reorder tone is sent To get a line again the user must go back on hook and then off hook Conditions This function works in the following cases When making a call 1 The first digit has not been dialed within 10 seconds 2 After a digit is dialed the next one is not dialed within five seconds Intercom call only Programming Reference
351. unt Button Section 3 Features Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry DPT Features SLT Features Account Code Entry Features 3 3 A 3 Features Alternate Calling Ring Voice Description This system offers two methods of Intercom Calling Ring Calling and Voice Calling Ring Calling informs the called party of an incoming call with a ring tone while the Voice Calling uses the calling party s voice The called extension user if he has a proprietary telephone can select tone or voice calling If the user selects Voice Calling the calling party can talk to the user immediately after confirmation tone The calling extension user is able to change the calling method pre selected once at a time by the called extension by pressing Ring Calling can be switched to Voice Calling and vice versa This operation is available for both proprietary and single line telephone users during calling Conditions Single line telephone users receive calls with Ring Calling only Programming References Station Programming 0 0 0 0 ceccceecceeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeneeees User Manual Intercom Alerting Assignment Feature References Section 3 Features Handsfree Answerback Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Alternate Calling Ring Voice Answering Direct CO Line Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to answer an incoming call by simply pressing the appropriate CO button wi
352. ure References Section 3 Features System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer Available for KX TD1232 only Installation 2 61 2 4 7 Caller ID Card Installation A maximum of two Caller ID Cards KX TD193 can be installed to the KX TD816 and a maximum of three Caller ID Cards can be installed to the KX TD1232 The Caller ID Cards can be installed to the initially provided CO Line Card and or to an optional 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 as required The CO Line Card of KX TD816 can attach one Caller ID Card and the CO Line Card of KX TD1232 can attach two Caller ID Cards 4 CO Line Unit can attach one Caller ID Card 1 Installing to the Initial CO Line Card KX TD816 1 Loosen four screws to open the inside cover of the main unit Note If any cards units or cords are installed to the main unit remove them beforehand 2 Attach the Caller ID Card to the CO Line Card fitting the connectors One card can be installed to the initial CO Line Card m CO Line Card Caller ID Card Inside cover 3
353. user to see the current state of the intercom line The table below shows the lighting patterns and the intercom line conditions INTERCOM Button Intercom Status Off Idle Green On Intercom call Conference established Green slow flash Intercom call hold Green moderate flash Intercom call exclusive hold Consultation hold Green rapid flash Incoming intercom doorphone call Conditions None Programming References No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Busy Lamp Field Operation References Not applicable Features 3 75 L 3 Features Limited Call Duration Description Limited Call Duration is a system programmable feature that disconnects a CO call when a specified timer expires A warning tone is sent to the extension user 15 seconds 10 seconds and 5 seconds before the time limit Limiting the call duration can be enabled or disabled by Class of Service COS for each extension Conditions e Any CO call except CO to CO call is limited by this feature For CO to CO calls CO to CO Call Duration is activated e It is programmable to select the limited call either incoming and outgoing call or outgoing call only Programming References Section 4 System Programming 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 990 System Additional Information Field 12 Feature References Section 3 Features Call Forwarding
354. v Y Y INTERCOM Vv Vv Vv Y A 4 Vv Vv Vv Y MESSAGE Vv Y Y Y Y A Vv Vv MONITOR Vv i Vv Y PAUSE Vv Vv Y Y vi kv Vv Vv PF Programmable Feature Y 4 W 4 W 4 W 4 WG W 12 PROGRAM A Vv Vv Y REDIAL Vv Vv Vv Y A A 4 Vv Vv Y SAVE Vv SHIFT Vv Vv Soft YG VG SP PHONE Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv TRANSFER Y Y Y Y A Y A Vv A Y VOLUME Vv Vv Vv Vv v The button is provided on the designated telephones t The button is provided with an LED Light Emitting Diode The buttons which can be changed to function as a feature button are called flexible buttons The button is provided without an LED x Shows the number of buttons only if multiple buttons are provided Features 3 19 3 Features The functions of the listed buttons are described below AUTO ANSWER MUTE This dual function button is used for extension auto answer and microphone mute during a conversation AUTO DIAL STORE Used for System Speed Dialing and storing program changes CO Central Office line Can be re assigned to a different CO or to various feature buttons CONF Conference Used to establish a three party conference FLASH Allows you to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging up Flash Sends a flash signal to the Central Office or a host PBX to access their features External Feature Access Function Used to perform the displayed function operation FWD DND Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Use
355. wed between digits on an outgoing toll call If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this time the DTMF receiver is released This timer applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed Time seconds 5 through 30 10s 1 4 5 Enter 208 Display Inter Digit Time Press NEXT Display example Time 10 sec Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time Press STORE Press END e This timer is used for toll restriction checking e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Toll Restriction 4 58 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times Description Sets the number of times Automatic Redial is tried Automatic redialing of the last dialed or saved number is done up to the specified number of times Selection Number of times 1 through 30 Default Model Number Default KX TD816BX C ML 10 times KX TD1232 D BX C ML KX TD8 16HK NZ 3 times KX TD1232HK NZ KX TD1232 D X 2 times Programming 1 Enter 209 Display Redial Times 2 Press NEXT Display example Attempt 15 3 Enter the number of times To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number of times 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e Program 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time is used to set the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts e You cannot leave the entry empty Fea
356. wiring it is recommended to use UL il jal i 1015 AWG 22 twisted wire or the all d equivalent WI ul Ss e The wire should be between 1 2 and 2 4 mm 2 3 64 and 3 32 inch in diameter including the coating y 2 Loosen the screws E D 1 2 2 4 mm 3 64 3 32 inch Ba e Set the door opener paired with the doorphone s The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit ul H d m ml 2 e Installation 2 67 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Maximum cabling distance of the doorphone and the door opener line The maximum length of the doorphone and door opener line that connects to the main unit is shown below 26 AWG Under 70 m 230 feet 24 AWG Under 113 m 370 feet 22 AWG Under 180 m 590 feet Doorphone KX T30865 22 AWG Under 180 m 590 feet Door Opener Notes The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit Programming References Section 4 System Programming 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Feature References Section 3 Features Door Opener Doorphone Call 2 68 Installation 2 4 9 System Connection To connect two main units use the optional System Inter Connection Cards two and the Connection Cable included in the cards 1 Insert upper side of the System Inter Connection Card into tw
357. wiring is required for each extension Connect pins D1 and D2 only CTT and R are not necessary Installation 2 25 2 3 3 Extension Connection for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 Connection of Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles for KX TD1232 Connection of the Proprietary Telephone KX T7130 6 conductor wiring is required for each extension Connect pins T R D1 D2 P1 and P2 T Tip D1 Data 1 P1 3 Pair Voice OHCA R Ring D2 Data 2 P2 3 Pair Voice OHCA Connection of a Digital Proprietary Telephone KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 or KX T7250 4 conductor wiring is required for each extension Connect pins D1 and D2 only CTT and R are only needed if Section 2 3 4 Paralleled Telephone Connection Method 2 is used for parallel or XDP connection of a DPT and a single line telephone Connection of an Analog Proprietary Telephone KX T7020 KX T7030 KX T7033 KX T7050 or KX T7055 4 conductor wiring is required for each extension Connect pins T R D1 and D2 Connection of a Single Line Telephone KX T7051 or KX T7052 2 conductor wiring is required for each extension Connect pins T and R Connection of a DSS Console KX T7040 or KX T7240 4 conductor wiring is required for each ext
358. xtension Programming DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night Description Selection Default Programming A DIL 1 N line can be assigned to ring more than one extension All incoming calls from the programmed CO lines are directed to the specified extensions These programs assign the extensions and the notification method for each CO line in both day and night modes e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Disab disable Immdt immediate ringing IRNG 1 ring delay 3RNG 3 rings delay 6RNG 6 rings delay NORNG no ring All jacks 1 2 all CO lines Immediate ringing Day Night 1 Enter a program address 603 for day or 604 for night Display example DIL 1 N Asn Day 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 CO01 Immdt 4 Enter the CO line number You can also keep pressing or lt until the desired CO line number is displayed 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and t
359. y calls e Pressing the PAUSE button in dialing number inserts a pause for a pre assigned time 3 94 Features 3 Features P Programming References Feature References Operation References Pickup Dialing Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Automatic line access ARS CO line group line access 311 Special Carrier Access Codes 411 Host PBX Access Codes 412 Pause Time Section 3 Features Host PBX Access Toll Restriction Not applicable Allows an extension user to make an outgoing call by going off hook if the user has previously stored the telephone number This feature is also known as Hot Line e A rotary dial telephone without the button cannot program this feature For programming the phone number replace a rotary dial telephone to the telephone with the button temporarily e The user uses a feature number to enable or disable pickup dialing e If the feature is enabled and the user goes off hook dial tone is generated for the waiting time and then dialing starts During the waiting time the user can dial another party overriding the Pickup Dialing function e If the user answers an incoming call or retrieves a call on hold the Pickup Dialing feature does not work e If the proprietary telephone is provided with PF 12 button the stored number of PF12 button is common to the one for Pickup Dialing Programming References Feature Ref
360. y to transfer it e Doorphone calls and paging calls cannot be placed on Consultation Hold e A new incoming call will not arise at the extension which is keeping a call on Consultation Hold The extension is regarded as busy e Ifa calling party is placed on hold music is sent to the party if available Music on Hold e If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Transfer Recall starts e Ifa CO call is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected Programming References Section 4 System Programming 201 Transfer Recall Time 990 System Additional Information Fields 2 5 Feature References Section 3 Features Call Splitting Call Transfer Unscreened Call Transfer Screened to Conference CO Line Conference Unattended Call Transfer Screened to Music on Hold Extension Operation References Not applicable 3 44 Features 3 Features D Data Line Security Description Data Line Security is a function that can be set on individual extensions Once set communication between the extension and the other end is protected from any signal such as Call Waiting Hold Recall and from Executive Busy Override Data equipment or a facsimile may be connected to an extension jack so that the user can perform data communications During the communication Data Line Security maintains secure data transmission against tones or barging in from other extensions Co
361. ystem installation and wiring instructions as well as how to install the optional cards and units Section 3 Features Describes all the basic optional and programmable features in alphabetical order It also provides information about the programming required conditions connection references related features and operation for every feature Section 4 System Programming Provides step by step programming instructions for a proprietary telephone Section 5 List Lists tone ring tone and default values of system programming Section 6 Troubleshooting Provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting NOTE The following documents may be used in conjunction with this manual User Manual for KX TD816 KX TD1232 System DIGITAL Proprietary Telephones DSS Console and Single Line Telephones Programming Table The programming table is designed to be used as a hard copy reference to the user programmed data Information There are some features and items unavailable for certain KX TD816 KX TD1232 models The table below shows what features items are unavailable for which models and in which sections they are described Model Number of Unavailable Related Section Main Unit Feature Item KX TD816C Panasonic Clip Section 2 3 4 KX TD1232C Terminal KX A205 Optional Extension Connection of KX A205 Clip Terminal Panasonic Lightning Protector KX A207 Section 2 3 11 Installation of Lig

3 Features A

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents